Pioneer S-EV1000V Operating Instructions
Stereo Cassette Deck Receiver XV-EV500 XV-EV700 XV-EV1000 Speaker System S-EV500V S-EV700V S-EV1000V Operating Instructions EV-500-1000.book 1 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT D3-4-2-1-1_En-A W ARNING This equipment is not waterproof. T o prevent a fir e or shock hazard, do not place any container filed with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_A_En W ARNING The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or r egion. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area wher e this unit will be used meets the requir ed voltage (e.g., 230V or 120V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_A_En Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully . W ARNING To prevent a fir e hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En VENTILA TION CAUTION When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to impr ove heat radiation (at least 30 cm at top, 15 cm at rear , and 15 cm at each side). W ARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are pr ovided for ventilation to ensure r eliable operation of the product, and to pr otect it from overheating. T o prevent fir e hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 úC â 35 úC ( 41 úF â 95 úF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. To ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The following caution label appears on your unit. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT D3-4-2-1-8_A_En Location: bonnet of the unit T aiwan model All other models Location: rear of the unit This product complies with the Low V oltage Directive (73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC), EMC Directives (89/336/EEC, amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC). D3-4-2-1-9a_En Recording equipment and copyright: R ecording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the countr y in which you are making a copy . Copying of copyright material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners. K018_En EV-500-1000.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Medium size screwdriver D3-4-2-1-5_En V oltage selector Y ou can find the voltage selector switch on the rear panel of multi-voltage models. The factory setting for the voltage selector is 220VâÂÂ230V . Please set it to the correct voltage for your country or region. ⢠Saudi Arabia operates on 127V and 220V mains voltage. Please set to the correct voltage before using. ⢠F or T aiwan , please set to 110VâÂÂ127V before using. ⢠F or Mexico, please set to 110VâÂÂ127V before using. Before changing the voltage, disconnect the AC power cord. Use a medium size screwdriver to change the voltage selector switch. CAUTION The ST ANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord ser ves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En CAUTION T hese speaker terminals carr y HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage . T o prevent the risk of electric shock when connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables, disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated parts. D3-4-2-2-3_A_En CAUTION : USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MA Y RESUL T IN HAZARDOUS RADIA TION EXPOSURE. CAUTION : THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD. D6-8-2-1_En NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to P art 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter ference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter ference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the inter ference by one or more of the following measures: â Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. â Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . â Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. â Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. D8-10-1-2_En Information to User Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user âÂÂs right to operate the equipment. D8-10-2_En CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment. T o prevent electromagnetic interference with electric appliances such as radios and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections. D8-10-3a_En For T aiwan exclusively T aiwanese two pin flat-bladed plug EV-500-1000.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
4 En Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so that you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them in a safe place for future reference . Contents 01 Before you start Checking whatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Loading the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Range of the remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . 6 Attaching the non-skid pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Removing the front speaker grilles . . . . . . . . 7 02 Connecting up Connecting the speaker terminals . . . . . . . . . 8 Multichannel speaker connections . . . . . . . . . 9 Hints on speaker placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Attaching the surround speakers to the speaker stands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Optional surround speaker connections . . . . 10 Connecting the radio antennas . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . 11 Connecting to your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Connecting using the component video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Connecting auxiliary components . . . . . . . . . 12 Connecting the power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 03 Controls and displays Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 04 Getting started Setting the clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . 19 Using the on-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Basic playback controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Resume and Last Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 DVD-Video disc menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Video CD/Super VCD PBC menus . . . . . . . 21 Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Improving FM stereo sound . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Listening to other sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 05 Setting up for surround sound Home theater sound setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Setting the channel levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Choosing your surround settings . . . . . . . . . 24 System Setup menu options . . . . . . . . . . . 24 06 Home theater sound About the listening modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Auto listening mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Using Front Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Listening with headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Using Advanced Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Using the Sound menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 07 Playing discs Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Playing a JPEG slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Browsing DVD or Video CD/Super VCD discs with the Disc Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Browsing WMA, MP3, DivX video and JPEG files with the Disc Navigator . . . . . . . . 29 Looping a section of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Using repeat play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Using random play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Creating a program list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Using the OSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Other functions available from the program menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Using the front panel display . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Searching a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Switching language / audio channels . . . . . . 33 Zooming the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Displaying disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 08 Using the tape deck Playing cassette tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Basic playback controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Making tape recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Automatically recording CDs (ASES) . . . . . . . 35 09 More tuner features Memorizing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Manually saving station presets . . . . . . . . . 37 Automatically saving station presets . . . . . 37 Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 EV-500-1000.book 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
5 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español 10 Singing karaoke Singing karaoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Changing the vocal mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Changing the backing track . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 11 Adjusting the sound Using the Sound menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Using the Sound Field Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Boosting the bass level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Muting the sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 12 Using the timer Setting the wake-up timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Turning the wake-up timer on/off . . . . . . . . 40 Setting the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Setting the record timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Turning the record timer on/off . . . . . . . . . . 41 13 Audio Settings and Video Adjust menu Audio Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Audio DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Virtual Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Video Adjust menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 14 Initial Settings menu Using the Initial Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Video Output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Display settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Options settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Parental Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 About DivXî VOD content . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 15 Additional information Optional system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 System Setup menu options in standby . . . 48 Using and taking care of discs . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 DVD Video regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Disc / content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Disc compatibility table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 About DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 DivX video compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 About WMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Storing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Discs to avoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Using cassette tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Tapes you should avoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Protecting your recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Problems with condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Moving the system unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 DVD/CD/Video CD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 WMA/MP3/JPEG discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Tape deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Using the language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 EV-500-1000.book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 6 En Chapter 1 Before you start Checking whatâÂÂs in the box Please check that you've received the following supplied accessories: ⢠Remote control ⢠Dry cell batteries (AA/R6) x2 ⢠Video cord ⢠AM loop antenna ⢠FM antenna ⢠Power cord: Central and South American, Taiwan, Philippines models x2 All other models x1 ⢠Speaker cords x3 (S-EV1000 only) ⢠Speaker stands x2 (S-EV700/1000 only) ⢠Non-skid pads x12 (S-EV700/1000 only) ⢠Power plug adapter (Central and South American, US Military and Duty Free models only) ⢠Warranty Card (US Military and Duty Free models only) ⢠These operating instructions Loading the batteries Use AA/R6 batteries with the supplied remote control. Make sure to follow the indications ( î , î ) inside the compartment. Important Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions: ⢠Never use new and old batteries together. ⢠Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries properly according to the marks in the battery case. ⢠Batteries with the same shape may have different voltages. Do not use different batteries together. ⢠When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instructionâÂÂs rules that apply in your country or area. Range of the remote control unit The remote control has a range of about 7 meters (23 ft). It may not work properly if: ⢠There are obstacles between the remote control and this unitâÂÂs remote sensor. ⢠Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the remote sensor. ⢠This system is located near a device that is emitting infrared rays. ⢠This unit is operated simultaneously with another infrared remote control unit. EV-500-1000.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 7 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Attaching the non-skid pads EV700/1000 model only Use the self-adhesive non-skid pads to provide a stable base for the speakers. Attach four to each speaker or stand 1 as shown below. Removing the front speaker grilles If necessary, remove the front speaker grilles as described below. 1 Gently ease the grille loose by gripping the bottom and pulling towards you. 2 Pull the top free in the same way. When reattaching, start from the top then push the bottom in until secure. ⢠It is not recommended (due to dirt and dust) to leave the speaker grilles removed. ⢠Since the speaker grilles may come loose, make sure to place the speakers in a location where they will not cause injury. Note 1 If you choose to use the Front surround 3-spot setup (as explained in Home theater sound setup on page 23), it is necessary to use the speaker stands provided (do not attach the pads to the base of the surround speakers). Using the speaker stands for the Standard surround 5-spot setup is optional. See Attaching the surround speakers to the speaker stands on page 10 for more on this. Center speaker Surround speaker Speaker stands EV-500-1000.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 8 En Chapter 2 Connecting up Important ⢠Before making or changing any connections, switch off the power and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. ⢠When making cable connections, make sure not to bend the cables over the top of this unit. This may cause a humming noise from the speakers. Connecting the speaker terminals Connect the wires from the speakers to the terminals on the main unit rear panel as shown below. Before connecting, you may want to consider the placement options available in your room, and when using this system: 1 ⢠EV500 model only â Place the front left and right speakers at equal distances from the TV, then connect them as shown below. See Optional surround speaker connections on page 10 to connect surround speakers. ⢠EV700/1000 model only â A color-coded system is provided for speaker connections (see Multichannel speaker connections below). See Home theater sound setup on page 23 for surround placement options. Caution ⢠Do not connect this speaker to any amplifier other than the one supplied with this system. Connection to any other amplifier may result in a malfunction or fire. ⢠Make sure that the bare speaker wires cannot touch each other, or come into contact with other metal parts once the unit is switched on. 1 Twist and pull off the protective shields on each wire. 2 Connect to the speaker terminals on the rear of the unit. Make sure to insert the red/colored wire into the red/colored ( ) tab and the black/white wire into the black (âÂÂ) tab. 3 EV 1000 only: Connect to the terminals on the rear of the subwoofer and front speakers in the same way. Note 1⢠The speakers supplied with this system are magnetically shielded. However, placing them extremely close to a television may result in color distortion on the screen. If this happens, move the speakers a little further away and switch off the telev ision for 15âÂÂ30 minutes. EV-500-1000.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 9 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Multichannel speaker connections EV700/1000 model only Connect each speaker using the color-coded speaker cable. Match them to the colored labels above the speaker terminals (see illustration below). *This connection is required only for the EV1000 model. Hints on speaker placement The following guidelines will help you to get the best performance from your speaker system. See Home theater sound setup on page 23 for surround placement options with this system. ⢠Place the front left and right speakers at equal distances from the TV. ⢠Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is localized at the TV screen. Caution ⢠If you choose to install the center speaker on top of the TV, be sure to secure it with putty, or by other suitable means, to reduce the risk of damage or injury resulting from the speaker falling from the TV in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes. ⢠If possible, place the surround speakers slightly above ear level. SPEAKERS L L R R SURROUND FRONT CENTER SUB WOOFER Front right* Surround right Surround left Front left* Subwoofer* Center Gray Blue White Red Purple Green EV700/1000DVD EV-500-1000.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 10 En ⢠Try not to place the surround speakers further away from the listening position than the front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect. ⢠Be sure all speakers are installed securely to prevent accidents and improve sound quality. Attaching the surround speakers to the speaker stands EV700/1000 model only If you have set up your system using the Front surround 3-spot setup (as explained in Home theater sound setup on page 23), it is necessary to use the speaker stands provided. Using the speaker stands for the Standard surround 5- spot setup is optional. Attach each speaker as shown in the steps below. 1 Line up the spurs on the speaker stand with the holes on the back of the surround speaker and press into place. 2 With the spurs fixed in place, pull the speaker downward to secure it on the stand. Optional surround speaker connections EV500 model only Using RCA speaker cables, you can connect surround speakers to the left and right SURROUND speaker jacks on the rear panel for multichannel sound from this system. For the best surround effect, place the surround speakers slightly above ear level and at the same distance from the listening position as the front speakers. Important ⢠Use speakers with a nominal impedance of at least 16 ⦠. ⢠Make sure you connect both surround speakers or you wonâÂÂt be able to hear anything from the surround jacks. Connecting the radio antennas Connecting the supplied antennas will allow you to listen to both AM and FM radio broadcasts. If you find that reception quality is poor, an outdoor antenna should give you better sound qualityâÂÂsee Connecting external antennas below for more on how to do this. 12 SURROUND L R ANTENNA AM LOOP ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75⦠3 1 2 4 6 fig. a fig. b fig. c EV-500-1000.book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 11 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español 1 Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna wires. 2 Push open the tabs, then insert one wire fully into each terminal, then release the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires. 3 Fix the AM loop antenna to the stand. To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the direction indicated by the arrow ( fig. a ) then clip the loop onto the stand ( fig. b ). ⢠If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a wall or other surface, secure the stand with screws ( fig. c ) before clipping the loop to the stand. Make sure the reception is clear. 4 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and point in the direction giving the best reception. DonâÂÂt let it come into contact with metal objects and avoid placing near computers, television sets or other electrical appliances. 1 5 Connect the FM wire antenna in the same way as the AM loop antenna. For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a wall or door frame. DonâÂÂt drape loosely or leave coiled up. Connecting external antennas External AM antenna Use 5âÂÂ6 meters of vinyl-insulated wire and set up either indoors or outdoors. Leave the AM loop antenna connected. External FM antenna Use a PAL connector to hook up an external FM antenna. Connecting to your TV This system offers three types of video connections. If your TV has component video inputs, see Connecting using the component video output below. 1 Use the supplied yellow video cable to connect the VIDEO OUT jack to a video input on your TV. For a better image, you can also use a commercially available S-Video cable to connect the S-VIDEO OUT jack to an S-Video input on your TV. 2 Optionally: Use a stereo audio cable to connect the audio outs of your TV (or VCR) to the LINE IN jacks on the rear of this unit. This will enable you to hear the TV (or VCR) sound through this system. See Connecting auxiliary components below for more on this. Note 1 The signal ground ( î ) is designed to reduce noise that occurs when an antenna is connected. It is not an electrical safety ground. ANTENNA AM LOOP ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75⦠Outdoor antenna 5âÂÂ6m Indoor antenna (vinyl-coated wire) ANTENNA AM LOOP ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75⦠PA L connector VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT EV-500-1000.book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 12 En Connecting using the component video output If your TV has component video inputs, you can use these instead of the standard or S-Video output to connect this system to your TV. 1 This should give you the best quality picture from the three types of video output available. ⢠Use a component video cable to connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT to a set of component inputs on your TV. About progressive scan video Compared to interlace video, progressive scan video effectively doubles the scanning rate of the picture, resulting in a very stable, flicker- free image. Progressive scan video is available only from the component video output. Important ⢠If you connect a TV that is not compatible with a progressive scan signal and switch the system to progressive, you will not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press î STANDBY/ON to put the system in standby, then press and hold the front panel î (stop) button for about 7 seconds until the display shows MEM.CLR? . Press the front panel î or î button so that the display shows INTERL? . Press the front panel î button to set to interlace and switch the system back on. Compatibility of this player with progressive-scan and high-definition TVs. This player is compatible with progressive video Macro Vision System Copy Guard. 2 This system is compatible with the following Pioneer displays and monitors: PDP-505HDG, PDP-435HDG, PDP-5040HD, PDP4340HD, PDP-502MX, PDP-503HDG, PDP-504HDG, PDP-433HDG, PDP-434HDG, SD-532HD5, SD533HD5. Connecting auxiliary components This system has both stereo analog inputs and outputs. Use these to connect external components, such as a VCR, MD, CD-R or DAT recorder. ⢠Connect the LINE IN jacks on the rear panel to an auxiliary playback component. These include components such as a VCR, DAT, or your TV. Connect using RCA pin-plug stereo cables. ⢠Connect the LINE OUT jacks on the rear panel to a recording component. These include components such as a cassette deck, VCR, MD recorder, or another recorder with analog inputs. Connect using RCA pin- plug stereo cables. Note 1 The component video output is switchable between interlaced and progressive formats. See Video Output settings on page 44. COMPONENT VIDEO OUT L R L R CUT LINE VIDEO OUT P R P B Y S VIDEO OUT IN COMPONENT INPUT 2 Consumers should note that not all high-definition television sets are fully compatible with this product and may cause arti- facts to be displayed in the picture. In case of 525 progressive scan picture problems, it is recommended that the user switch the connection to the âÂÂstandard definitionâ output (Interlace). If there are questions regarding our TV set compatibility with this model, please contact our customer service center. EV-500-1000.book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 13 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Connecting the power After making sure that everything is connected properly, plug in the power cord to the AC inlet, and the other end to a mains power outlet. Congratulations! YouâÂÂre done setting up. AC IN EV-500-1000.book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 14 En Chapter 3 Controls and displays Front panel Illustration shows the EV700/1000 model 1 Display See Display below. 2 Sound options FRONT SURROUND (EV700/1000 only) â Switches on the Front Surround mode (page 26). SFC (EV500 only) â Selects sound modes or custom settings from the Sound Field Control (page 39). SOUND MODE Accesses settings in the Sound menu, such as the tone controls (page 39). KARAOKE â Selects audio channels for karaoke (page 38). ENTER â Selects options or executes commands. 3 X.BOOM button Press to switch on the bass boost (page 39). 4 TIMER indicator Lights when the timer has been set (page 40). 5 î STANDBY/ON Switches the player on or into standby. 6 Function select buttons Selects the source you want to listen to. 7 VOLUME /â Adjusts the volume level. 8 Remote sensor 9 PUSH OPEN Pressing down on this side on the cassette door will open the tape deck. 10 Disc tray 11 MIC VOL and MIC input jacks Controls the volume of the karaoke mics ( MAIN and SUB ) (page 38). 12 PHONES jack Headphone jack. PHONES SUB MAIN MIC VOL MS /FF MUSIC TIMER DVD/CD TAP E LINE TUNER VOLUME STANDBY/ON MOVIE FRONT SURROUND SOUND MODE KARA OKE ENTER REVERSE MODE REC/STOP ASES PUSH OPEN â TUNING î î î MSâÂÂ/REW MIC MIN MAX î î 1 4 14 12 13 7 8 9 6 5 10 11 3 2 EV-500-1000_03_con_displays.fm 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 15 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español 13 TUNING and playback control buttons The tuning/scan/skip buttons are used for tuning into stations, skipping or scanning tracks on discs or tapes. The playback control buttons are used for playing, pausing and stopping playback ( î ejects the disc). 14 Tape cassette controls REVERSE MODE â Selects the playback mode for tapes (page 34). REC/STOP â Starts/stops recording on the tape deck (page 35). ASES â Press for CD-to-tape synchro recording (page 35). Display 1 Character display 2 Karaoke indicators ECHO â Lights when the Karaoke ECHO effect is selected. KEY â Lights when the Karaoke pitch control is selected. KARAOKE (Vocal cancel) â Vocals in the backing track are partially eliminated using EQ. L â Left channel only. Use for tracks that have a vocal recorded in the right channel. R â Right channel only. Use for tracks that have a vocal recorded in the left channel. L R â Use to put a single-channel vocal track into the center of the mix. 3 Cassette deck indicators B.CUT â Lights when the beat cut mode has been switched to B.CUT 2 . ASES REC â Lights during ASES recording. REC â Lights when recording to the tape deck. î î â Indicates the direction of tape playback. â Indicates the reverse mode. 4 Format indicators 2 PRO LOGIC II (EV700/1000 only) â Lights during Dolby Pro Logic II decoding. 2 DIGITAL â Lights during playback of a Dolby Digital signal. DTS â Lights during playback of a DTS source. 5 Tuner indicators MONO â Lights when FM mono reception is selected. STEREO â Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo. mode TUNED â Lights when a broadcast is being received. 6 DSP indicators ADV.SURR. (EV700/1000 only) Lights when one of the Advanced or Front Surround listening modes is selected. SFC (EV500 only) Lights when one of the Sound Field Control listening modes is selected. SUB Wf ECHO B.CUT MONO AD V . SURR. SFC PGM RDM RPTâÂÂ1 LINE REC STEREO TU N ED 9 6 k H z 2 PRO LOGIC 2 DIGIT AL ASES REC DIALOGUE KEY KARA OKE L R WAK E â UP REC 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 9 10 16 EV-500-1000.book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 16 En 7 Channel indicators (EV700/1000 only) These will light according to which channels are encoded on the Dolby Digital or DTS multichannel disc currently in the player. LFE lights when the disc has an LFE channel. 8 Speaker and playback indicators The playback indicator ( î ) lights during playback, and the speaker indicators (EV700/1000 only) show which speakers are being used to output the current source. The illustrations below show some example displays. (When headphones are connected, none of the speaker indicators are lit.) 9 Playback mode indicators PGM â Lights during program play RDM â Lights during random playback RPT-1 â RPT lights during repeat play ( RPT- 1 lights during repeat one-track play) 10 96 kHz Lights when a 96kHz source is detected (may not light if the source is copyâÂÂprotected). 11 Timer indicators WAKE-UP â Lights when the wake-up timer is set. â Lights when the wake-up timer is set and flashes when it activates. REC â Lights when the record timer is set and flashes when the timer starts recording. 12 DIALOGUE (EV700/1000 only) Lights when Dialog Enhancement is on. 13 Lights when the sleep timer is active 14 Lights during multi-angle scenes on a DVD 15 LINE REC (EV700/1000 only) Lights when the line recording mode is switched on (see Using the Sound menu on page 27). 16 Level meter 5.1 channel surround sound Stereo (2.1 channel) sound 2 channel sound 5.1 channel surround sound with the Front Surround mode active SUB Wf SUB Wf SUB Wf EV-500-1000.book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 17 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Remote control Illustration shows the EV700/1000 model 1 î STANDBY/ON Switches the player on or into standby. 2 Input source function select Selects the source you want to listen to. 3 DVD control buttons AUDIO â Selects the audio channel or language (page 33). SUBTITLE â Selects a subtitle display (page 33). ANGLE â Changes the camera angle during DVD multi-angle scene playback (page 33). ZOOM â Changes the zoom level (page 33). 4 Sound Field / DSP buttons X.BOOM â Switches the bass boost on or off (page 39). SFC / SOUND FIELD (EV500 only) Selects sound modes or custom settings from the Sound Field Control (page 39). SURROUND (EV700/1000 only) â Selects a surround listening mode (page 25) ADVANCED (EV700/1000 only) â Selects an advanced listening mode (page 26) FRONT SURROUND (EV700/1000 only) â Switches on the Front Surround mode (page 26). 5 KARAOKE controls KARAOKE â Selects audio channels for karaoke (page 38). ECHO â Changes the echo level on the karaoke mics (page 38). KEY CONTROL â Lowers/raises the pitch of the backing track (page 38). 6 VOLUME Adjusts the volume level. 7 HOME MENU Press to display (or exit) the on-screen menu for Initial Settings, Play Mode functions, etc. SYSTEM SETUP ( SHIFT HOME MENU ) Use to make various system and surround sound settings (page 48 and ( EV700/1000 only ) page 24). Also used when automatically saving station presets when using the tuner (page 37). 8 ENTER , TUNE & cursor control buttons Navigates on-screen displays and menus. ENTER selects an option or executes a command. 12 3 45 6 78 90 CLEAR ENTER SYSTEM SETUP HOME MENU TOP MENU DVD MENU SHIFT CHANNEL VOL UME INPUT SUBTITLE VOLUME ANGLE ZOOM SURROUND ADVANCED FRONT SURROUND ECHO DSP AUDIO DVD/CD TAPE FM/AM LINE X.BOOM PROGRAM ST .MEMORY TEST TONE REPEAT MONO CH LEVEL RANDOM TIMER K ARAOKE I â KEYCON â i DISPLAY MUTE RETURN SOUND MODE ENTER STANDBY/ON 4 / e E / 1 á â 8 7 3 3 3 TUNE ST ST â TUNE â DVD TV CONTROL 1 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 16 17 15 13 14 4 5 EV-500-1000.book 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 18 En 9 SOUND MODE Accesses settings in the Sound menu, such as the tone controls (page 39). 10 Playback controls î â Starts/resumes playback î and îÂÂ/î â Use for reverse slow motion playback, frame reverse and reverse scanning î and î / î â Use for forward slow motion playback, frame advance and forward scanning î â Jumps to the next chapter or track î â Jumps to the beginning of the current chapter or track, then to previous chapters/tracks î â Pauses playback; press again to restart î â Stops playback 11 Number buttons and SHIFT functions The number buttons can be used for selecting tracks directly, the functions above the buttons are accessed by pressing SHIFT at the same time as the button. PROGRAM ( SHIFT 1 ) â Use to program/ play a program list (page 31). REPEAT ( SHIFT 2 ) â Selects a repeat play mode (page 30). RANDOM ( SHIFT 3 ) â Selects a random play mode (page 31). ST.MEMORY ( SHIFT 4 ) â Use for saving and listening to station presets (page 37). MONO ( SHIFT 5 ) â Press to listen to a stereo FM broadcast in mono (page 22). TIMER ( SHIFT 6 ) â Use for setting and checking the clock (page 19) and the timers (page 40). TEST TONE ( SHIFT 7 ) (EV700/1000 only) â Press to output the test tone for speaker setup (page 23). CH LEVEL ( SHIFT 8 ) (EV700/1000 only) â Use to adjust the speaker level (page 23). CLEAR â Clears an entry ENTER â Selects menu options, etc. (works exactly the same as the ENTER button in 8 above) 12 SHIFT Press to access the functions/commands written in green on the remote 13 MUTE Mutes the volume (page 39). 14 DISPLAY Switches between information displays (page 33). 15 TOP MENU Displays the top menu of a DVD disc. DVD MENU Displays the DVD menu (for Video CD/ Super VCDs, DivX video and WMA/MP3/ JPEG discs, the Disc Navigator screen appears). 16 RETURN Press to return to a previous menu screen. 17 TV CONTROL 1 î â Switches the TV on or into standby INPUT â Switches the TV input CHANNEL /â â Selects channels VOLUME /â â Adjusts the TV volume Note 1 Refer to Setting up the remote to control your TV on page 19 to use these controls with your TV. EV-500-1000.book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 19 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Chapter 4 Getting started Setting the clock Setting the clock allows you to use the timer. 1 1 Press TIMER (SHIFT 6). 2 If âÂÂCLK ADJ?â isnâÂÂt in the display, select it with î or î , then press ENTER . 3 Use î / î to set the hour. Press ENTER . 4 Use î / î to set the minute then press ENTER to confirm. Setting up the remote to control your TV You can set up the supplied remote to control your TV using the TV CONTROL buttons. 2 1 Switch on your TV. 2 Find the name of the manufacturer of your TV in the Preset Code List on page 60. Next to each manufacturer is one or more three digit codes. These tell the remote what kind of TV you have. If the name of the manufacturer of your TV does not appear in the table, you wonâÂÂt be able to set up this remote to control your TV. 3 Point the remote at your TV, hold down the CLEAR button, then enter the three digit code for your TV. The remote transmits an on/off signal to the TV. If youâÂÂve entered the correct code, your TV should switch off. If your TV doesnâÂÂt turn off, repeat the procedure using the next code in the list until your TV switches off successfully. Once set, you can then use the individual TV controls shown below. Using the on-screen displays For ease of use, this system makes extensive use of graphical on-screen displays (OSDs). All the screens are navigated in basically the same way, using the cursor buttons ( î , î , î , î ) to change the highlighted item and pressing ENTER to select it. 3 Note 1 The default setting is 12-hour format. See Optional system settings on page 48 to change it. 2⢠The default setting is for a Pioneer TV. ⢠Note that there are also cases where the codes listed for a manufacturer in the Preset Code List may not work for your TV. SYSTEM SETUP HOME MENU TOP MENU DVD MENU RETURN SOUND MODE ENTER TUNE ST ST â TUNE â 3 45 6 78 9 0 ENTER SHIFT CHANNEL VOLUME INPUT ST.MEMORY TEST TONE MONO CH LEVEL TIMER TV CONTROL Button What it does î Switches your TV on or into standby . CHANNEL /â Changes the TV channel. VOLUME Adjusts the volume. INPUT Switches the TVâÂÂs input between the built in TV tuner and an external video source. 3 The screen saver will appear after five minutes of inactivity. EV-500-1000.book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 20 En Important ⢠Throughout this manual, âÂÂSelectâ means use the cursor buttons to highlight an item on-screen, then press ENTER . Tip ⢠The button guide at the bottom of every OSD screen shows you which buttons youâÂÂll need to use for that screen. Playing discs The basic playback controls for playing DVD, CD, Video CD/Super VCD, DivX video and MP3/ WMA discs are covered here. Further functions are detailed in chapter 7. 1 If the player isnâÂÂt already on, switch it on. If youâÂÂre playing a DVD, Video CD/Super VCD or DivX video, also turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the correct video input. 2 Press î on the front panel to load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if youâÂÂre loading a double-sided DVD disc, load it with the side you want to play face down). 3 Press î (play) to start playback. If youâÂÂre playing a DVD or Video CD/Super VCD, a menu may appear. See DVD-Video disc menus on page 21 and Video CD/Super VCD PBC menus on page 21 to navigate these. If youâÂÂre playing a DivX video or WMA/MP3 disc, it may take a few seconds before playing. If you loaded a CD/CD-R/RW containing JPEGs, a slideshow will start. See Playing a JPEG slideshow on page 28 for more on this. ⢠If a disc contains a mixture of DivX video and other media file types (MP3, for example), first select whether to play the DivX video files ( DivX ) or the other media file types ( MP3 / WMA / JPEG ) from the on- screen display. 4 Adjust the volume. Use the VOLUME /â control. Basic playback controls The following table shows the basic controls on the remote for playing discs 1 . You can find other playback features in the chapter 7. Button What it does HOME MENU Displays/exits the on-screen display îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî Changes the highlighted menu item ENTER Selects the highlighted menu item RETURN Returns to the main menu without saving changes Note 1 You may find with some DVD discs that some playback controls donâÂÂt work in certain parts of the disc. Button What it does î Starts/resumes normal playback. ⢠If the display shows RESUME or LAST MEM playback starts from the resume or last memor y point (see Resume and Last Memory below). î P auses/unpauses a disc. î Stops playback or cancels the resume function (if the display shows RESUME ). î P ress to start fast reverse scanning. î P ress to start fast forward scanning. î Skips to the start of the current track or chapter , then previous tracks/chapters. î Skips to the next track or chapter . EV-500-1000.book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 21 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Resume and Last Memory When you stop playback of a disc, RESUME shows in the display indicating that you can resume playback from that point. With DVDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, even if ejected, the play position is stored in memory. 1 The next time you load the disc, the display shows LAST MEM and you can resume playback. If you want to clear the resume point, press î (stop) while RESUME is displayed. DVD-Video disc menus Many DVD-Video discs contain menus from which you can select what you want to watch. Sometimes DVD-Video menus are displayed automatically when you start playback; others only appear when you press DVD MENU or TOP MENU ( SHIFT DVD MENU ). Video CD/Super VCD PBC menus Some Video CD/Super VCDs have menus from which you can choose what you want to watch. These are PBC (Playback control) menus. You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD without having to navigate the PBC menu by starting playback using a number button to select a track, rather than the î (play) button. Listening to the radio The tuner can receive both FM and AM broadcasts, and lets you memorize your favorite stations so you donâÂÂt have to manually tune in every time you want to listen (see More tuner features on page 37 for more on this). 1 Press FM/AM to switch to the tuner, then press repeatedly to select the AM or FM band. The display shows the band and frequency. 2 Tune to a frequency. There are three tuning modesâÂÂmanual, auto, and high-speed: Numbers Use to enter a title/chapter/track number . P ress ENTER to select. ⢠If the disc is stopped, playback starts from the selected title (for DVD) or track (for CD/Video CD/Super VCD). ⢠If the disc is playing, playback jumps to the start of the selected title (VR mode DVD-RW), chapter (DVD - Video) or track (CD/Video CD/Super VCD). Note 1⢠The Last Memory function may not work with some discs. ⢠For DVD-Video discs (except VR mode DVD-RW), the player stores the play position of the last five discs. Button What it does TOP MENU ( SHIFT DVD MENU ) Displays the âÂÂtop menuâ of a DVD discâÂÂthis varies with the disc. DVD MENU Displays a DVD disc menuâÂÂthis varies with the disc and may be the same as the âÂÂtop menuâÂÂ. îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî Moves the cursor around the screen. Button What it does ENTER Selects the current menu option. RETURN Returns to the previously displayed menu screen. Numbers Highlights a numbered menu option (some discs only). P ress ENTER to select. Button What it does RETURN Displays the PBC menu. Numbers Selects numbered menu options. P ress ENTER to select. î Displays the previous menu page (if there is one). î Displays the next menu page (if there is one). Button What it does EV-500-1000.book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 22 En ⢠Manual tuning : Press TUNE /â repeatedly to change the displayed frequency. ⢠Auto tuning : Press and hold TUNE /â until the frequency display starts to move, then release. The tuner will stop on the next station it finds. Repeat to keep searching. ⢠High-speed tuning : Press and hold TUNE /â until the frequency display starts to move rapidly. Keep the button held down until you reach the frequency you want. If necessary, fine tune the frequency using the manual tuning method. Improving FM stereo sound If youâÂÂre listening to an FM station in stereo but the reception is weak, you can improve the sound quality by switching to mono. ⢠Press MONO ( SHIFT 5) to choose âÂÂFM MONO?â then press ENTER . The MONO indicator lights when the tuner is in mono reception mode. Select FM AUTO? above to switch back to auto- stereo mode (the STEREO indicator lights when receiving a stereo broadcast). Listening to other sources You can connect an external source for playback through this systemâÂÂs speakers. See Connecting auxiliary components on page 12 for more on this. 1 Make sure that the external source (TV, MD player, etc.) is switched on. 2 Press LINE to select the source connected to the rear panel LINE input. 3 If necessary, start playback of the source. Tip ⢠If an auxiliary source is producing unpleasant distortion from the speakers, you can reduce the signal level by switching on the attenuator. See Optional system settings on page 48 to do this. EV-500-1000.book 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Setting up for surround sound 05 23 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Chapter 5 Setting up for surround sound EV700/1000 model only Home theater sound setup Depending on the size and characteristics of your room, you can place your speakers in one of two ways using this system: 1 ⢠Standard surround 5-spot setup â This is a standard multichannel surround sound speaker setup for optimal 5.1 channel home theater sound. ⢠Front surround 3-spot setup â This setup is ideal when rear surround speaker placement isn't possible or you want to avoid running long speaker cables in your listening area. Use this setup together with the Front Surround modes to take advantage of wall and ceiling reflections for a very realistic surround effect. After placing your speakers, complete Setting the channel levels then refer to Speaker distance setting on the next page to complete your surround sound setup. Setting the channel levels Set the relative channel levels from your main listening position. 2 1 Press TEST TONE ( SHIFT 7). The test tone is output in the following order (from the speakers active in the current listening mode): ⢠L â Front left speaker ⢠C â Center speaker ⢠R â Front right speaker ⢠RS â Surround right speaker ⢠LS â Surround left speaker ⢠SW â Subwoofer 3 2 Use the VOLUME /â button to adjust the volume to an appropriate level. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to adjust the speaker levels in turn. You should hear the test tone at the same volume from each speaker when seated in the main listening position. The channel level range is ñ 10 dB. 4 When youâÂÂre done, press TEST TONE to exit test tone setup. Note 1 See About the listening modes on page 25 for more on using the different listening modes with each speaker setup. Fr o nt left Surround left Listening position Center Subwoofer Fr ont right Surround right Fr o nt left Fr o nt right Surround left Surround right Listening position Center Subwoofer 2⢠Make sure headphones are unplugged. ⢠The channel balance can be adjusted (independently for each listening mode) while listening to any sound source you want: Press CH LEVEL ( SHIFT 8 ) then use îÂÂ/î to select channels and îÂÂ/î to adjust the level. Press ENTER when youâÂÂre finished. 3 Since the subwoofer produces ultra-low frequencies its sound may seem quieter than it actually is. EV-500-1000.book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Setting up for surround sound 05 24 En Choosing your surround settings To get the best possible surround sound from your system, make the settings below. You should only need to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your speakers or wish to change settings for a particular disc). 1 Press SYSTEM SETUP (SHIFT HOME MENU). 1 2 Use îÂÂ/î to choose the setting. The current setting is shown for each option as you cycle through the display. See below for a full list and description of each. 3 Use îÂÂ/î to adjust. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for other settings. 5 When youâÂÂre done, press ENTER to leave the System Setup menu. System Setup menu options Below are all the available settings in the setup menu. 2 The first setting in each section is the default. See also the notes in each section for additional information about the settings. Speaker distance setting Specifies the distance from your listening position to your speakers. When DIST.? appears, press ENTER , then use îÂÂ/î to adjust the distance, and îÂÂ/î to switch between the following speakers: ⢠L â Front left speaker ⢠C â Center speaker ⢠R â Front right speaker ⢠RS â Surround right speaker ⢠LS â Surround left speaker ⢠SW â Subwoofer Each speaker can be adjusted between 0.3m ~ 9m . The default setting is 3m . Dynamic Range Control Specifies dynamic range adjustment to Dolby Digital or DTS soundtracks: 3 ⢠DRC OFF â No dynamic range adjustment (use when listening at higher volume) ⢠DRC MID â Mid setting ⢠DRC HIGH â Dynamic range is reduced (loud sounds are reduced in volume while quieter sounds are increased) LFE attenuator setting Dolby Digital and DTS audio sources include ultra-low bass tones. Set the LFE attenuator as needed to prevent the ultra-low bass from distorting the sound. ⢠LFEATT 0 â No attenuation ⢠LFEATT 10 â LFE channel attenuated 10dB ⢠LFE Off â LFE channel is not played Subwoofer setting You can switch between subwoofer settings to provide extra bass or to hear the subwoofer channel âÂÂas isâÂÂ. ⢠SW PLUS â This provides extra bass when listening to an audio source ⢠SW AUTO â The subwoofer channel is heard without any additional processing. DTS CD setting If you play a DTS-encoded CD, you will need to change this setting to hear the decoded signal. When CD TYPE? appears, press ENTER , then use îÂÂ/î to select the setting: ⢠NORM.CD â Regular CD playback, DTS- encoded CDs may output some noise ⢠DTS-CD â Proper decoding of DTS- encoded CDs, but regular CD playback may lose quality Note 1 These settings canâÂÂt be changed when recording, or when the Line Recording feature is on (see Using the Sound menu on page 27). 2 If the tuner is selected, the auto preset feature also appears (see Automatically saving station presets on page 37). 3 This setting works only with Dolby Digital and some DTS soundtracks. EV-500-1000.book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Home theater sound 06 25 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Chapter 6 Home theater sound EV700/1000 model only About the listening modes As explained in Home theater sound setup on page 23, there are two basic surround speaker setup options available. Of course you can select any of the listening modes regardless of how you place your speakers, but you will achieve the best surround effect by using the listening modes in conjunction with your speaker setup: ⢠Standard surround 5-spot setup â Use the Standard ( Listening in surround sound on page 25) and Advanced ( Using Advanced Surround on page 26) surround listening modes 1 with this setup. ⢠Front surround 3-spot setup â See Using Front Surround on page 26 for the options 1 available with this speaker setup. Make sure you have completed Setting the channel levels on page 23. For a more detailed surround sound setup, see Choosing your surround settings on page 24. Auto listening mode The Auto listening mode is the simplest way to listen to any source as it was mastered: the output from the speakers mirrors the channels in the source material. ⢠Press SURROUND to select the AUTO listening mode. Listening in surround sound You can listen to stereo or multichannel sources in surround sound. Surround sound is generated from stereo sources using one of the Dolby Pro Logic decoding modes. ⢠Press SURROUND repeatedly to select a listening mode. The choices that appear in the display will vary according to the type of source thatâÂÂs playing. ⢠AUTO â Auto listening mode (see above) ⢠DOLBY DIGITAL / DTS â Dolby Digital or DTS decoding (depending on the source). 2 For a multichannel source, this will be the same as AUTO . ⢠PROLOGIC (Dolby Pro Logic) â 4.1 channel surround sound for use with any two- channel source ⢠MOVIE (Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) â Pro Logic II 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to movie sources (use with any two-channel source) ⢠MUSIC (Dolby Pro Logic II Music) â Pro Logic II 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to music sources, for use with any two-channel source ⢠STEREO â See Listening in stereo below Note 1 These listening modes do not work with 96kHz sources. SUBTITLE ANGLE ZOOM SURROUND ADVANCED FRONT SURROUND ECHO DSP AUDIO X.BOOM K ARAOKE I â KEYCON â i DISPLAY MUTE DVD 2 When listening in DOLBY DIGITAL / DTS mode, two-channel material will automatically be played in surround sound using Dolby Pro Logic II decoding. SUBTITLE ANGLE ZOOM SURROUND ADVANCED FRONT SURROUND ECHO DSP AUDIO X.BOOM K ARAOKE I â KEYCON â i DISPLAY MUTE DVD EV-500-1000.book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Home theater sound 06 26 En Using Front Surround The Front Surround modes are effective when you are using the Front surround 3-spot speaker setup as described in Home theater sound setup on page 23. The surround speakers should be placed on top of the front speakers and oriented (about 60ú) towards the walls (as a guide, line up the edge of the speaker stand base with the front edge of the speaker as shown below). You can adjust the amount of Front Surround effect in Using the Sound menu on page 27. ⢠Press FRONT SURROUND to select an Front Surround mode. Press repeatedly to select from: ⢠FRT MOVIE â The Front Surround Movie mode gives a movie theater-type sound. ⢠FRT MUSIC â The Front Surround Music mode gives a concert hall-type sound. ⢠EXT POWER â The Extra Power mode gives additional energy to stereo sources. Listening in stereo You can listen to any sourceâÂÂstereo or multichannelâÂÂin stereo. When playing a multichannel source, all channels are downmixed to the front left/right speakers and the subwoofer. ⢠Press SURROUND repeatedly until STEREO shows in the display. Listening with headphones When headphones are connected, only the STEREO mode is available. 1 Using Advanced Surround The Advanced Surround modes can be used with any multichannel or stereo source for a variety of additional surround sound effects. 2 You can adjust the amount of effect applied in Using the Sound menu on page 27. ⢠Press ADVANCED to select an Advanced Surround mode. Press repeatedly to select from: ⢠ADV MOVIE â Gives a movie theater-type sound ⢠ADV MUSIC â Gives a concert hall-type sound ⢠EXPANDED â Creates an extra wide surround field 60ú 60ú Left speaker Right speaker î î SUBTITLE ANGLE ZOOM SURROUND ADVANCED FRONT SURROUND ECHO DSP AUDIO X.BOOM K ARAOKE I â KEYCON â i DISPLAY MUTE DVD Note 1 When you disconnect them it reverts to the previous mode. 2 The Standard surround setup described in Home theater sound setup on page 23 should be used with these effects. SUBTITLE ANGLE ZOOM SURROUND ADVANCED FRONT SURROUND ECHO DSP AUDIO X.BOOM K ARAOKE I â KEYCON â i DISPLAY MUTE DVD SUBTITLE ANGLE ZOOM SURROUND ADVANCED FRONT SURROUND ECHO DSP AUDIO X.BOOM K ARAOKE I â KEYCON â i DISPLAY MUTE DVD EV-500-1000.book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Home theater sound 06 27 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español ⢠TV SURR. â Designed for mono or stereo TV broadcasts and other sources ⢠SPORTS â Designed for sports and other programs based on commentary ⢠GAME â Creates surround sound from video game sources ⢠5 STEREO â Designed to give powerful surround sound to stereo music sources Using the Sound menu There are several optional sound settings you can make from the sound menu. 1 Press SOUND MODE . 2 Use îÂÂ/î to choose the setting you want to adjust. The current setting is shown for each option (in the order shown in step 3, with the defaults in bold ) as you cycle through the display. 3 Use îÂÂ/î to adjust. Make adjustments to the following settings: 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for other settings. 5 When youâÂÂre done, press ENTER to leave the Sound menu. Setting What it does Option(s) Bass Adjusts the amount of bass. âÂÂ4 to 4 Treble Adjusts the amount of treble. âÂÂ4 to 4 Effect Sets the effect level for the currently selected Advanced or Front Surround mode (each mode can be set separately). 10 to 90 Dialog Enhancement (Press ENTER in step 2 to access) Localizes dialog in the center channel to make it stand out from other background sounds in a TV or movie soundtrack. OFF MAX MID SYSTEM SETUP HOME MENU TOP MENU DVD MENU RETURN SOUND MODE ENTER TUNE ST ST â TUNE â Center Width a Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center channel between the front right and left speakers, making it sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings). 0 to 7 Default: 3 Dimension a Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back, making the sound more distant (minus settings), or more forward (positive settings). âÂÂ3 to 3 Default: 0 Panorama a Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a âÂÂwraparoundâ effect. OFF ON Line Recording b (Press ENTER in step 2 to access) To record a surround- compatible downmix (left- total/right-total, or Lt/Rt) of a Dolby multichannel source (such as a DVD) from the line outputs of this system, switch this feature on. This enables improved playback with systems that can provide matrix-decoding (like Dolby Pro Logic). Switch to OFF for a simple stereo downmix (left- only/right-only, or Lo/Ro, which is suitable for playback on a two-channel stereo system or on headphones). OFF ON a. Only available when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode. b. ⢠When the Line Recording mode is on, most sound features cannot be used. The display will briefly blink RMODE ON if you try and use a prohibited function. ⢠This mode automatically switches off if you change the in- put function ( DVD/CD , TUNER , etc.) or switch the power off. ⢠When the Line Recording mode is off, audio from the an- alog output may be interrupted, depending on the operation. Setting What it does Option(s) EV-500-1000_05_home_theater.fm 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 07 28 En Chapter 7 Playing discs Important ⢠Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to DVD discs, Video CDs/ Super VCDs, CDs, DivX video and WMA/ MP3/JPEG discs, although the exact operation of some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. ⢠Some DVDs restrict the use of some functions (random or repeat, for example) in some or all parts of the disc. This is not a malfunction. ⢠When playing Video CD/Super VCDs, some of the functions are not available during PBC playback. If you want to use them, start the disc playing using a number button to select a track. Scanning discs You can fast-scan discs forward or backward at various different speeds. 1 ⢠During playback, press î or î to start scanning. Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed (shown on-screen). ⢠To resume playback, press î (play). 2 Playing in slow motion You can play DVDs, Video CD/Super VCDs and DivX video at four different forward slow motion speeds. DVD discs can also be played in reverse slow motion. 1 During playback, press î (pause). 2 Press and hold î or î until slow motion playback starts. Press repeatedly to change the slow motion speed (shown on-screen). ⢠To resume playback, press î (play). 2 Frame advance/frame reverse You can advance or back up DVD discs frame- by-frame. With Video CD/Super VCDs and DivX video you can only use frame advance. 1 During playback, press î (pause). 2 Press î or î to reverse or advance a frame at a time. ⢠To resume playback, press î (play). 2 Playing a JPEG slideshow After loading a CD/CD-R/RW containing JPEG pictures, press î to start a slideshow from the first folder/picture on the disc. 3 The player displays the pictures in each folder in alphabet- ical order. Pictures are automatically adjusted so that they fill as much of the screen as possible. While the slideshow is running: Note 1 Only one speed is available for DivX video discs. 2⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. ⢠With Video CD/Super VCDs in PBC mode or a WMA/MP3 track, playback automatically resumes at the end or beginning of the track. 3⢠The time it takes for the player to load a file increases with large file sizes. Button What it does î P auses the slideshow ; press again to restart. î Displays the previous picture. EV-500-1000.book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 07 29 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Browsing DVD or Video CD/ Super VCD discs with the Disc Navigator Use the Disc Navigator to browse through the contents of a DVD or Video CD/Super VCD disc to find the part you want to play. 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on- screen menu. 2 Select a view option. The options available depend on the kind of disc loaded and whether the disc is playing or not, but include: ⢠Title â Titles from a DVD-Video disc. ⢠Chapter â Chapters from the current title of a DVD-Video disc. ⢠Track â Tracks from a Video CD/Super VCD disc. ⢠Time â Thumbnails from a Video CD/Super VCD disc at 10 minute intervals. ⢠Original: Title â Original titles from a VR mode DVD-RW disc. ⢠Playlist: Title â Playlist titles from a VR mode DVD-RW disc. ⢠Original: Time â Thumbnails from the Original content at 10 minute intervals. ⢠Playlist: Time â Thumbnails from the Playlist at 10 minute intervals. The screen shows up to six moving thumbnail images displayed one after another. To display the previous/next six thumbnails, press î / î . 3 Select the thumbnail image for what you want to play. You can use either the cursor buttons ( îÂÂ/îÂÂ/ îÂÂ/î ) and ENTER to select a thumbnail, or the number buttons. To select using the number buttons, enter a two-digit number then press ENTER . Browsing WMA, MP3, DivX video and JPEG files with the Disc Navigator Use the Disc Navigator to find a particular file or folder by filename. î Displays the next picture. îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î P auses the slideshow and rotates/ï¬Âips the displayed picture. (P ress î (play) to restart slideshow). ZOOM P auses the slideshow and zooms the picture. P ress again to toggle between 1x, 2x and 4x zoom. (P ress î (play) to restart slideshow). DVD MENU Displays the Disc Navigator screen (see below). Button What it does Disc Navigator Disc Navigator Title Chapter 01 04 02 05 03 06 Disc Navigator: Title 01- 49: - - EV-500-1000.book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 07 30 En 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on-screen menu. 2 Use the cursor buttons ( îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ) and ENTER to navigate. Use the cursor up/down buttons ( îÂÂ/î ) to move up and down the folder/file list. Use the cursor left button ( î ) to return to the parent folder. 1 Use ENTER or cursor right ( î ) to open a highlighted folder. ⢠When a JPEG file is highlighted, a thumbnail image is displayed on the right. 3 To play the highlighted track or DivX video file or display the highlighted JPEG file, press ENTER. ⢠When a WMA/MP3 or DivX video file is selected, playback begins from that file, and continues until the end of the folder. ⢠When a JPEG file is selected, a slideshow begins, starting with that file, and continues to the end of the folder. Tip ⢠To play the contents of the whole disc rather than just the current folder, exit the Disc Navigator and start playback using the î (play) button. Looping a section of a disc The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points (A and B) within a track (CD, Video CD/Super Video CD) or title (DVD) that form a loop which is played over and over. 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select â Play Mode âÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂA-B RepeatâÂÂ. 2 3 Press ENTER on âÂÂA(Start Point)â to set the loop start point. 4 Press ENTER on âÂÂB(End Point)â to set the loop end point. After pressing ENTER , playback jumps back to the start point and plays the loop. 5 To resume normal playback, select âÂÂOffâÂÂ. Using repeat play In addition to various repeat play options, itâÂÂs also possible to use repeat play together with program play (see Creating a program list on page 31). 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select â Play Mode âÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂRepeatâ then select a repeat play option. 3 If program play is active, select Program Repeat to repeat the program list, or Repeat Off to cancel. Note 1 You can also do this by going to the â .. â folder at the top, then pressing ENTER . 00:00 / 00:00 0kbps Folder1 Folder2 Folder3 Folder4 File1 File2 File3 File4 File5 Folder 2 00:00 / 00:00 0kbps 2 You canâÂÂt use repeat play with WMA/MP3 discs. 3 You canâÂÂt use A-B Repeat play with WMA/MP3 or DivX video discs. EV-500-1000.book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 07 31 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español ⢠For DVD discs, select Title Repeat , Chapter Repeat or Repeat Off . ⢠For CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select Disc Repeat , Track Repeat or Repeat Off . ⢠For DivX video discs, select Repeat Title (or Repeat Off ). Tip ⢠You can also use the REPEAT ( SHIFT 2 ) button on the remote to select a repeat play option. The repeat modes available are the same as those from the Play Mode menu. Using random play Use this function to play titles or chapters (DVD-Video) or tracks (CD and Video CD/Super VCD) in a random order. 1 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select â Play Mode âÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂRandomâ then select an option. ⢠For DVD discs, select Random Title , Random Chapter or Random Off . ⢠For CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select On or Off to switch random play on or off. Tip ⢠Use the following controls during random play: ⢠You can also use the RANDOM ( SHIFT 3 ) button on the remote to select a random play mode. The random modes available are the same as when choosing from the Play Mode menu. Press ENTER to start random play. ⢠Random play remains in effect until you select Random Off from the random play menu options. Creating a program list This feature lets you program the play order of titles/chapters/tracks on a disc. 2 Using the OSD 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select â Play Mode âÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂProgramâ then select âÂÂCreate/Editâ from the list of program options. 3 Use the cursor buttons and ENTER to select a title, chapter or track for the current step in the program list. For a DVD disc, you can add a title or a chapter. ⢠For a CD or Video CD/Super VCD, select a track to add to the program list. After pressing ENTER to select the title/ chapter/track, the step number automatically moves down one. 4 Repeat step 3 to build up a program list. A program list can contain up to 24 steps. Note 1⢠You can set the random play option when a disc is playing or stopped. However, you can't use random play together with program. ⢠You canâÂÂt use random play with VR format DVD-RW discs, WMA/MP3 discs, DivX video discs, or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. Button What it does î Selects a new track/title/chapter at random. î Returns to the beginning of the current track/title/chapter; further presses select another random track/title/chapter. 2 You canâÂÂt use Program play with VR format DVD-RW discs, WMA/MP3 discs, DivX video discs, or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. Button What it does EV-500-1000.book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 07 32 En ⢠You can insert steps by just highlighting the position where you want the new step to appear and entering a title/chapter/track number. ⢠To delete a step, highlight it and press CLEAR . 5 To play the program list, press î (play). Program play remains active until you turn off program play (see below), erase the program list (see below), eject the disc or switch off. Tip ⢠Use the following controls during program play: Other functions available from the program menu There are a number of other options in the program menu in addition to Create/Edit. ⢠Playback Start â Starts playback of a saved program list ⢠Playback Stop â Turns off program play, but does not erase the program list ⢠Program Delete â Erases the program list and turns off program play Using the front panel display Even though the OSD is available for CDs, the front panel display provides information to make a program list easily. If a disc is playing, stop it first. 1 Press PROGRAM (SHIFT 1). YouâÂÂre prompted to enter a track for the first step in the program list. 2 Use the number buttons to select a track, then press ENTER . If you make a mistake, press CLEAR to delete the last (most recently) programmed track. 3 Repeat step 2 to build up a program list. A program list can contain up to 24 steps. 4 To play the program list, press î (play). ⢠Program play remains active until you press î (stop), clear the playlist (see tip above), eject the disc or switch off the player. Searching a disc You can search DVD discs by title or chapter number, or by time; CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs by track number or time; DivX video discs by time. 1 Press HOME MENU and select â Play Mode âÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂSearch ModeâÂÂ. The search options that appear depend on the kind of disc loaded. 3 Select a search mode. ⢠The disc must be playing in order to use time search. 4 Use the number buttons to enter a title, chapter or track number, or a time. ⢠For a time search, enter the number of minutes and seconds into the currently playing title (DVD/ DivX video) or track (CD/ Video CD/Super VCD) you want playback to resume from. For example, press 4 , 5 , 0 , 0 to have playback start from 45 minutes into the disc. For 1 hour, 20 minutes and 30 seconds, press 8 , 0 , 3 , 0 . 5 Press ENTER to start playback. Button What it does HOME MENU Save the program list and exit without starting playback. î Skip to the next step in the program list. EV-500-1000.book 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 07 33 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Switching subtitles Some DVD discs and DivX video discs have subtitles in one or more languages; the disc box will usually tell you which subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle language during playback. 1 ⢠Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a subtitle option. ⢠To set subtitle preferences, see Language settings on page 45. ⢠See Displaying DivX subtitle files on page 50 for more on DivX subtitles. Switching language / audio channels When playing discs recorded with dialog in two or more languages, or with dual-mono audio 2 you can switch these during playback. 3 ⢠Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an audio language option. ⢠To set audio language preferences, see Language settings on page 45. Zooming the screen Using the zoom feature you can magnify a part of the screen by a factor of 2 or 4, while watching a DVD, DivX video title or Video CD/ Super VCD or playing a JPEG disc. 1 During playback, use the ZOOM button to select the zoom factor (Normal, 2x or 4x). 2 Use the cursor buttons to change the zoomed area. You can change the zoom factor and the zoomed area freely during playback. 4 Switching camera angles Some DVD discs feature scenes shot from two or more anglesâÂÂcheck the disc box for details. When a multi-angle scene is playing, a icon appears on screen (this can be switched off if you preferâÂÂsee Display settings on page 45). ⢠During playback (or when paused), press ANGLE to switch angle. Displaying disc information Various track, chapter and title information can be displayed on-screen during playback. ⢠To show/switch/hide the information displayed, press DISPLAY repeatedly. Limited disc information also appears in the front panel display. Press DISPLAY to change the displayed information. Note 1 Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU or DVD MENU to access. 2 Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks. With these discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as well as individual channels in each. 3 Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU or DVD MENU to access. 4⢠Since DVD, Video CD/Super VCD, DivX video title and JPEG pictures have a fixed resolution, picture quality will deteriorate, especially at 4x zoom. This is not a malfunction. ⢠If the navigation square at the top of the screen disappears, press ZOOM again to display it. EV-500-1000.book 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the tape deck 08 34 En Chapter 8 Using the tape deck Playing cassette tapes This unit has a tape deck that can be used for both recording and playback. In addition, it features automatic music search (AMS) and auto-reverse functions 1 . See Making tape recordings below for more features. 1 Push down on the cassette door where indicated to open it and insert a tape. 2 Close the cassette door. 3 Press REVERSE MODE (front panel only) to select the reverse mode. Press repeatedly to choose between: ⢠î â Single side playback ⢠î â Auto-reverse playback: stops after finishing playback in the âÂÂreverseâ ( î ) direction ⢠î â Continuous playback (up to 16 complete plays) 4 Press TAPE to start playback. You can also press îÂÂî (remote) or î (front panel) to start playback when TAPE is selected. The side of the tape youâÂÂll hear is whichever is face up when you load it. This is the âÂÂforwardâ ( î ) direction, while the other side is âÂÂreverseâ ( î ). The direction indicator is shown in the display. Basic playback controls The following table shows the basic controls on the remote for playing discs. Note 1 The auto-reverse feature lets you play or record a tape without physically taking it out and turning it over. Button What it does TAPE ( îÂÂî ) Starts/resumes normal playback. Each time you press either button during playback, the other side of the tape starts playing. Pressing TAPE ( îÂÂî ) when the tape is stopped starts playback on the side it was playing previously. î P auses playback. î Stops playback. Also resets the tape counter to 0000 if pressed when the tape is already stopped. î P ress to fast-rewind a tape. î P ress to fast-forward a tape. î / î a a. Track search is unlikely to work reliably if: â the space between tracks is less than about 4 seconds. â the recording is noisy so the spaces are not recognized. â the recording contains frequent silences, such as a lan- guage study tape. â the recording contains sections of very quiet material, such as some classical music recordings. Searches for the previous / next blank space between tracks on the side currently playing (in other words, to the start of the current / next track), then resumes playback. By pressing more than once, the tape will skip several tracks at once (up to a maximum of 15). For example, press î twice to skip forward two tracks. EV-500-1000.book 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the tape deck 08 35 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Making tape recordings You can make tape recordings from the radio, CDs, or from an external component connected to the auxiliary inputs. 1 If you're recording from CD itâÂÂs convenient to use the ASES modeâÂÂsee Automatically recording CDs (ASES) below. Unlike some tape decks, thereâÂÂs no need to set recording levels; the deck sets the level automatically. When recording, the volume has no effect on the recording. This means that you can record something with the volume turned right down if you want. 1 Press TAPE then load a cassette into the tape deck. In order to follow these instructions more easily, load the cassette 2 with side A facing up, then use the front panel controls. 2 Check the recording direction. If you start recording in the î direction, both sides of the tape can be recorded (unless the erase protect tab for side B is missing). If you switch sides and start recording in the î direction, then recording will start from side B and stop when the end of the tape is reached. If you need to change the direction, press î ( îÂÂî ) twice, then î (stop). 3 Set the reverse mode (page 34). ⢠î (record one side only) ⢠î or î (record both sides if recording starts in the î (forward) direction, or one side if recording starts in the î (reverse) direction) 4 Select the source you want to record. For example, press TUNER ( FM/AM on the remote) to record from the radio. If youâÂÂve selected a CD, make sure that itâÂÂs stopped. You canâÂÂt record while TAPE is selected. 5 Prepare the source for recording. For example, tune in the radio station. 6 Press REC/STOP (front panel only). The REC indicator lights in the display and the deck starts recording. 7 Start the source playing (if necessary). 8 When youâÂÂre ready to stop recording, press REC/STOP again. Automatically recording CDs (ASES) Auto Synchro Editing System (ASES for short) makes recording CDs 3 (including those with WMA/MP3 audio files) automatic. It also makes sure that a CD track isnâÂÂt spread over two sides of a tape. If the tape runs out midway through a CD track, the same track is automatically recorded from the beginning again on the other side. 4 1 Prepare the tape deck for recording. Recording starts in the î (forward) direction, so take care which way you load the tape. 2 Load the CD you want to record. 3 Press DVD/CD , then press î (stop). The CD should now be selected, but not playing. Note 1⢠Once recording has started, you canâÂÂt switch to another component until recording has stopped. So, for example, you canâÂÂt switch over to the tuner while youâÂÂre recording a CD. ⢠EV700/1000 model only â During recording, all multichannel sources are downmixed to two channels. 2⢠Before recording, check that the cassette erase-protect tabs have not been broken, and that the tape is Type I (normal posi- tion). You canâÂÂt record on Type II (high/CrO2) or IV (metal) tapes using this deck. ⢠If youâÂÂre recording from the start of a tape, itâÂÂs a good idea to wind the tape on a little so that you donâÂÂt accidently start re- cording over the leader tape. You can either do this by hand, or load the tape into the deck and play the tape for 5âÂÂ6 seconds. 3 You canâÂÂt make ASES tape recordings of Video CD/Super VCDs or DVD-Video discs. 4 ASES may not work correctly if the first side of the tape finishes at the same time as a track ends. If this happens, stop the recording then resume on the other side without ASES. EV-500-1000.book 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the tape deck 08 36 En If you want to record the tracks in a different order, or record only one track, use the program play featureâÂÂsee page 31 for how to make a program list. Make sure playback is stopped, then press PROGRAM ( SHIFT 1 ) before going to the next step. 4 Press ASES to start recording. The ASES REC indicator lights, followed by a 4 second pause while the tape winds past the leader, then recording starts. Recording finishes automatically when the end of the disc is reached, or the tape ends (whichever comes first). 5 If you want to stop recording before the end of the CD, press î (stop). Tip ⢠If you find that youâÂÂre getting noisy recordings from an AM radio station, see Optional system settings on page 48 to change the beat cut mode. ⢠If you find that the auxiliary source signal is too high (resulting in unpleasant distortion in your recording), you may need to reduce the signal level of the line source by switching on the attenuator (see Optional system settings on page 48 to do this). EV-500-1000.book 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
More tuner features 09 37 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Chapter 9 More tuner features Memorizing stations You can save up to 30 station presets so that you always have easy access to your favorite stations without having to tune in manually each time. 1 Manually saving station presets 1 Tune to an AM or FM radio station. For the FM band, select mono or auto-stereo reception as necessary. This setting is saved along with the preset. 2 Use ST /â or the number buttons to select a station preset then press ENTER . Automatically saving station presets 1 Press SYSTEM SETUP ( SHIFT HOME MENU ), use îÂÂ/î to choose âÂÂA. PRESETâ then press ENTER . Auto tuning starts in the FM band, stopping when a strong signal is received. 2 When auto tuning stops at a station, press ENTER to save the station as a preset, or press îÂÂ/î to continue without saving. Auto tuning resumes. After the FM band is finished, auto tuning continues in the AM band. Press î (stop) anytime to exit. Auto tuning stops automatically after the AM band is finished, or after the limit of 30 presets has been reached. When this happens, the tuner automatically switches to preset ST-1 . Listening to station presets 1 Press FM/AM repeatedly to select the station preset mode. The display shows ST . 2 Use the ST /â buttons to select a station preset. ⢠You can also use the number buttons and ENTER to do this. Note 1 If the system is unplugged, saved stations will remain for several days, after which youâÂÂll have to save them again. EV-500-1000.book 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Singing karaoke 10 38 En Chapter 10 Singing karaoke Singing karaoke Using the karaoke features you can plug in a microphone and mix the sound of your own voice with a backing track. 1 The backing track can be anything you like, from a song on the radio, to a dedicated DVD karaoke disc. Adjust the microphone level relative to the backing track. 1 Set the MIC VOL knob (front panel) to minimum. 2 Plug in the microphone(s). If youâÂÂre only using one mic, plug it into the MIC (MAIN) jack. The MIC (SUB) jack can be used only if MIC (MAIN) is also connected. ⢠If the microphone has an on/off switch, make sure itâÂÂs on. 3 Load a karaoke backing disc or tape. You can also use the radio or a component connected to the auxiliary inputs as source material for a backing track. 4 To change the mix (CD or Video CD/Super VCD only), press KARAOKE . Press to switch between these options: 2 ⢠KARAOKE (Vocal cancel) â Backing track vocals are partially eliminated using EQ. ⢠L CH â Left channel only. Use for tracks that have a vocal recorded in the right channel. ⢠R CH â Right channel only. Use for tracks that have a vocal recorded in the left channel. ⢠L R CH â Use to put a single-channel vocal track into the center of the mix. ⢠OFF â Switches the Karaoke mode off. 5 Play the backing track. 6 Adjust the MIC VOL knob. To avoid unpleasant feedback, make sure you donâÂÂt point the microphone(s) at the speakers. 3 7 Sing! Changing the vocal mix Adding some effects to the microphone mix can sometimes improve the overall sound. You can choose between three echo levels. ⢠To add effects to the microphone mix, press ECHO. Pressing repeatedly switches between echo levels 1 to 3 and off. Changing the backing track You may want to lower or raise the pitch of the backing track to match your vocal range. ⢠Press KEY CONTROL î ( SHIFT KARAOKE ) or î ( SHIFT ECHO ) to lower or raise the pitch of the backing track. Note 1 EV700/1000 model only â These features are only possible when a microphone is connected. Also note that during DVD play- back, using the karaoke features (including connecting a mic) automatically switches to STEREO playback and downmixes mul- tichannel sources to two channels. 2 The current setting is first shown in the display. SUB MAIN MIC VOL MIC MIN MA X 3 Depending on the microphone level, the sound of the disc may distort. If this happens, turn down the volume. EV-500-1000.book 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Adjusting the sound 11 39 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Chapter 11 Adjusting the sound Using the Sound menu EV500 only 1 There are several optional sound settings you can make from the sound menu. 1 Press SOUND MODE . 2 Use îÂÂ/î to choose the setting you want to adjust. The current setting is shown for each option (in the order shown in step 3) as you cycle through the display. 3 Use îÂÂ/î to adjust. Make adjustments to the following settings: 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for other settings. 5 When youâÂÂre done, press ENTER to leave the Sound menu. Tip ⢠You can store your current bass, treble and stereo-wide settings as a preset. Simply hold ENTER for three seconds, use îÂÂ/î to select USER 1 or USER 2 then press ENTER again to confirm. You can now select this preset from the SFC menu (see Using the Sound Field Control below). Using the Sound Field Control EV500 only Depending on the source youâÂÂre listening to, you may want to use the Sound Field Control to match the source youâÂÂre listening to. 2 ⢠Press SFC repeatedly to select a mode. The options are as follows: ⢠ACTION â Good for sound effects. ⢠DOME â Gives a âÂÂliveâ feel to the sound. ⢠DRAMA â Good for enhancing dialogue. ⢠KARAOKE â Reduces the level of vocal tracks on pre-recorded music. ⢠USER 1 / 2 â See Tip above. ⢠SFC OFF â ( SFC indicator disappears) Boosting the bass level If you want to bring up the low end for certain kinds of music or sound sources, you can use the bass boost to do so. ⢠Press X.BOOM repeatedly to select a mode. The options are as follows: ⢠X.BOOM M â Good for music with lots of bass. ⢠X.BOOM MV â Boosts low frequency (bass) sounds in movies. ⢠OFF â Switches the bass boost off. Muting the sound ⢠Press MUTE to switch off the volume. To switch the sound back on, adjust the volume or press MUTE again. Note 1 For the EV700/1000 model, see Using the Sound menu on page 27. Setting What it does Option(s) Bass Adjusts the amount of bass. âÂÂ4 to 4 Treble Adjusts the amount of treble. âÂÂ4 to 4 Balance Adjusts the left and right channel balance. CENTER to LEFT 10 / RIGHT 10 Stereo Wide Makes the stereo spread appear wider than it really is OFF ON 2 If you have adjusted sound parameters for separate SFC modes (from the sound menu), these are applied as well. EV-500-1000.book 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the timer 12 40 En Chapter 12 Using the timer Important ⢠The clock must be set for the timers to work properly (see Setting the clock on page 19). Setting the wake-up timer Use the wake-up timer to set the system to switch on at any time and start playing whatever source you want. 1 1 Select the source you want played. For example, press FM/AM to select the radio as your source. 2 Prepare the source and set the volume. For example, tune in the radio station you want to wake up to. Adjust the volume as necessary. 3 Press TIMER ( SHIFT 6) twice, use îÂÂ/î to select WAKE-UP then press ENTER . 4 Use îÂÂ/î to select EDIT then press ENTER . 5 Set the switch-on time. Use îÂÂ/î to set the hour, then press ENTER . Set the minute in the same way, pressing ENTER when youâÂÂre done. 6 Set the switch-off time. Set as above, pressing ENTER when done. The WAKE-UP indicator lights, and the switch-on, switch-off times, the function ( DVD/CD , etc.) and volume are confirmed in the display. 7 Switch the system into standby mode. The wake-up timer will not work if the system is left on! ⢠You can check the timer settings in standby by pressing TIMER ( SHIFT 6 ) twice. Turning the wake-up timer on/off If you have already set the wake-up timer, you can switch it on/off by selecting TIME ON or TIME OFF in step 4 above (press ENTER ). Setting the sleep timer The sleep timer switches off the system after a specified time so you can fall asleep without worrying about it. 2 1 Press TIMER ( SHIFT 6) twice, use îÂÂ/î to select SLEEP then press ENTER . 2 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) to select a switch-off time then press ENTER . Choose between the following options: ⢠AUTO â Switches off automatically after the currently playing CD or Video CD has finished. 3 ⢠SLEEP 90 â Switches off after 90 minutes ⢠SLEEP 60 â Switches off after an hour ⢠SLEEP 30 â Switches off after 30 minutes ⢠OFF â Cancels the sleep timer 3 To check how much time is left, repeat step 1. The remaining time is displayed momentarily. Note 1 You cannot have the wake-up timer and the record timer set at the same time. 2⢠If you set the sleep timer while either the wake-up or recording timer is active, the earlier switch off time takes priority. ⢠The system will switch into standby if you change the input function during AUTO sleep mode. 3 AUTO will not work with DVD/CDs in repeat play, cassette tapes, or Video CD/Super VCDs during PBC playback. EV-500-1000.book 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the timer 12 41 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Setting the record timer You can set the timer to record from the LINE source, or something off the radio. For example, you might want to record a program that is broadcast while you're at work. 1 1 Set up the tape deck. Load a cassette tape, wind on past the leader tape and set the reverse mode (see Making tape recordings on page 35 for more on this). 2 Select the source you want to record. Press FM/AM ( TUNER on the front panel) or LINE and prepare the source. 2 3 Press TIMER ( SHIFT 6) twice, use îÂÂ/î to select REC then press ENTER . 4 Use îÂÂ/î to select EDIT then press ENTER . 5 Set the switch-on time. Use îÂÂ/î to set the hour, then press ENTER . Set the minute in the same way, pressing ENTER when youâÂÂre done. 6 Set the switch-off time. Set as above, pressing ENTER when done. The REC indicator lights, then the switch-on, switch-off times and the function (or frequency, if you selected the tuner) are confirmed in the display. 7 Switch the system into standby mode. The record timer will not work if the system is left on! Turning the record timer on/off If you have already set the record timer, you can switch it on/off by selecting REC ON or REC OFF in step 4 above (press ENTER ). Note 1⢠During the actual recording, the volume is automatically set to minimum. After the recording has finished, the record timer is canceled. ⢠You cannot have the record timer and the wake-up timer set at the same time. 2 For example, if you select the tuner, tune in the station you want to record (see Listening to the radio on page 21). EV-500-1000.book 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Audio Settings and Video Adjust menu 13 42 En Chapter 13 Audio Settings and Video Adjust menu Audio Settings menu EV500 only 1 The Audio Settings menu offers features for adjusting the way discs sound. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂAudio Settingsâ from the on-screen display. 2 Select and change settings using the îÂÂ/ îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor) buttons, and ENTER . Audio DRC ⢠Settings: Low , Medium , High , Off (default) When watching Dolby Digital DVDs at low volume, itâÂÂs easy to lose the quieter sounds completelyâÂÂincluding some of the dialog. Switching Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) to on can help by bringing up the quieter sounds, while controlling loud peaks. How much of a difference you hear depends on the material youâÂÂre listening to. If the material doesnâÂÂt have wide variations in volume, you may not notice much change. 2 Virtual Surround ⢠Settings: On , Off (default) Switch on Virtual Surround to enjoy realistic surround sound effects from just two speakers. 3 Video Adjust menu From the Video Adjust screen you can adjust various settings that affect how the picture is presented. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo Adjustâ from the on-screen display. 2 Make settings using the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor) buttons and ENTER . You can adjust the following picture quality settings: ⢠Sharpness â Adjusts the sharpness of edges in the picture ( Fine , Standard , Soft ) ⢠Brightness â Adjusts the overall brightness ( âÂÂ20 to 20 ). ⢠Contrast â Adjusts the contrast between light and dark ( âÂÂ16 to 16 ). ⢠Gamma â Adjusts the âÂÂwarmthâ of the picture ( High , Medium , Low , Off ). ⢠Hue â Adjusts the red/green balance ( Green 9 to Red 9 ). Note 1 For the EV700/1000 model, see Dynamic Range Control in System Setup menu options on page 24 (this method of adjustment is also available for the EV500 model, but an extra setting of LOW also appears). 2⢠Audio DRC is only effective with Dolby Digital audio sources. ⢠The effect of Audio DRC also depends on your speakers and settings. Audio Settings 3⢠96kHz Linear PCM audio is automatically downsampled to 48kHz if Virtual Surround is switched on. ⢠How good the surround effect is varies with the disc. V ideo Adjust EV-500-1000.book 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Audio Settings and Video Adjust menu 13 43 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts how saturated colors appear ( âÂÂ9 to 9 ). Adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Hue and Chroma Level settings using the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons. 3 Press ENTER to return to the Video Adjust screen, or HOME MENU to exit. Brightness min max 0 EV-500-1000.book 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 14 44 En Chapter 14 Initial Settings menu Using the Initial Settings menu The Initial Settings menu provides audio and video output settings, parental lock settings, and display settings, among others. If an option is grayed out it means that it cannot be changed at the current time. This is usually because a disc is playing. Stop the disc, then change the setting. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Use the cursor buttons and ENTER to select the setting and option you want to set. All the settings and options are explained on the following pages. Important ⢠In the table below, the default setting is shown in bold : other settings are shown in italics . ⢠Some settings, such as TV Screen , Audio Language and Subtitle Language may be overridden by the DVD disc. Often these settings can also be made from the DVD disc menu. ⢠The Component Out setting only needs to be set if you have connected this player to your TV using component video. Video Output settings Initial Settings Setting Option What it means TV Screen (See also Screen sizes and disc formats on page 58.) 4:3 (Letter Box) Set if you have a conventional 4:3 TV. Widescreen movies are shown with black bars top and bottom. 4:3 (Pan & Scan) Set if you have a conventional 4:3 TV. Widescreen movies are shown with the sides cropped so that the image fills the screen. 16:9 (Wide) Set if you have a widescreen TV. Component Out (See also Connecting using the component video output on page 12.) Interlace Set if your TV is not compatible with progressive scan video. Progressive Set if your TV is compatible with progressive scan video (see your TVâÂÂs instruction manual for details). Press ENTER once more to confirm (or RETURN to cancel). Note that progressive scan video is only output from the component video jacks. EV-500-1000.book 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 14 45 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Language settings Display settings Options settings Setting Option What it means Audio Language English If there is an English soundtrack on the disc, it is played. Languages as displayed If there is a language selected on the disc, it is played. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (see Using the language code list on page 58). Subtitle Language English If there are English subtitles on the disc they are displayed. Languages as displayed The subtitle language selected on the disc is displayed. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (see Using the language code list on page 58). DVD Menu Language w/Subtitle Lang. DVD disc menus are displayed in the same language as your selected subtitle language, if possible. Languages as displayed DVD menus are displayed in the selected language, if possible. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (see Using the language code list on page 58). Subtitle Display On Subtitles are displayed in your selected subtitle language. Off Subtitles are always off by default when you play a DVD disc. Setting Option What it means OSD Language English On-screen displays of the player are in English. Languages as displayed On-screen displays are shown in the language selected. Angle Indicator On A camera icon is displayed on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a DVD disc. Off No multi-angle indication is shown. Setting Option What it means Parental Lock â See Parental Lock below. DivX VOD Display See About DivXî VOD content below. EV-500-1000.book 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 14 46 En Parental Lock ⢠Default level: Off ; Default password: none ; Default Country/Area code: us (2119) To give you some control over what your children watch on your DVD player, some DVD- Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. If your player is set to a lower level than the disc, the disc wonâÂÂt play. Some discs also support the Country/Area Code feature. The player does not play certain scenes on these discs, depending on the Country/Area Code you set. Registering a new password Register a password to change the Parental Lock level or enter a Country/Area code. 1 1 Select âÂÂPasswordâÂÂ. 2 Use the number buttons to input a 4-digit password then press ENTER . Changing your password To change your password, confirm your existing password then enter a new one. 1 Select âÂÂPassword ChangeâÂÂ. 2 Input your existing password, then press ENTER . 3 Enter a new password and press ENTER . Setting/changing the Parental Lock 1 Select âÂÂLevel ChangeâÂÂ. 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER . 3 Select a new level and press ENTER . ⢠Press î (cursor left) repeatedly to lock more levels (more discs will require the password); press î (cursor right) to unlock levels. You canâÂÂt lock level 1. Setting/changing the Country/Area code You can find the Country/Area code list on page 59. 1 Select âÂÂCountry CodeâÂÂ. 2 Input your password, then press ENTER . 3 Select a Country/Area code then press ENTER . There are two ways you can do this: ⢠Select by code letter: Use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/ down) to change the Country/Area code. ⢠Select by code number: Press î (cursor right) then use the number buttons to enter the 4-digit Country/Area code. The new Country/Area code takes effect after ejecting the disc once. Note 1⢠Not all discs use Parental Lock, and will play without requiring the password first. ⢠If you forget your password, youâÂÂll need to reset the player to register a new password. (see Resetting the system on page 53). Vi deo Output Language Display Options Parental Lock Photoviewer Password Level Change Country Code Initial Settings EV-500-1000.book 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 14 47 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español About DivX î VOD content In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this player, you first need to register the player with your DivX VOD content provider. You do this by generating a DivX VOD registration code, which you submit to your provider. 1 Important ⢠DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Digital Rights Management) system. This restricts playback of content to specific, registered devices. ⢠If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD content not authorized for your player, the message Authorization Error is displayed and the content will not play. Displaying your DivX VOD registration code 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂOptionsâÂÂ, then âÂÂDivX VODâÂÂ. 3 Select âÂÂDisplayâÂÂ. Your 8-digit registration code is displayed. Make a note of the code as you will need it when you register with a DivX VOD provider. Playing DivX î VOD content Some DivX VOD content may only be playable a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD content, the remaining number of plays is shown on-screen and you then have the option of playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has zero remaining plays), the message Rental Expired is displayed. If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited number of plays, then you may load the disc into your player and play the content as often as you like, and no message will be displayed. Note 1 Resetting the player (as described in Resetting the system on page 53) will not cause you to lose your registration code. Video Output Language Display Options Display Initial Settings Parental Lock DivX VOD Video Output Language Display Options Initial Settings DivX VOD Registration Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EV-500-1000.book 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 48 En Chapter 15 Additional information Optional system settings These settings are accessed by using the System Setup menu while in standby. 1 Switch the system into standby. 2 Press SYSTEM SETUP ( SHIFT HOME MENU ). 3 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) to choose the setting then press ENTER . The current setting is shown for each option as you cycle through the display. See below for a full list and description of each. 4 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) to adjust the setting then press ENTER to confirm. 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to make other settings. System Setup menu options in standby Below are all the available settings in the setup menu. The first setting in each is the default. System demo setting Switches the automatic demo feature on or off 1 (this starts when you plug in for the first time): ⢠DEMO ON â Switches the demo feature on. ⢠DEMO OFF â Switches the demo feature off. Key lock setting The Key Lock feature is useful when youâÂÂve set the wake-up timer and donâÂÂt want the system switched on before it activates. ⢠LOCK ON â Makes the front panel buttons and controls inoperative. ⢠LOCK OFF â Restores regular use of the front panel buttons and controls. Clock format setting Specifies how the clock is displayed: ⢠12-HOUR â Display shows 12-hour format. ⢠24-HOUR â Display shows 24-hour format. Line attenuator setting If the source connected to the analog LINE input is distorting, the attenuator will reduce the signal level. ⢠ATT 6DB â Reduces signal level by 6dB. ⢠ATT 10DB (EV700/1000 only) â Reduces signal level by 10dB. ⢠ATT OFF â No attenuation Tape deck beat cut setting Recording AM broadcasts on cassette tape can result in noisy recordings. If you experience this, change the beat cut mode. ⢠B.CUT 1 ⢠B.CUT 2 Frequency step setting If you find that you canâÂÂt tune into stations successfully, the frequency step may not be suitable for your country/region. ⢠AM 9K â AM 9kHz / FM50Hz ⢠AM 10K â AM10kHz / FM100Hz Note 1 After setting the clock, the demo mode switches off automatically. However, if you unplug the system from the wall outlet, the demo mode will revert to DEMO ON (and the clock will be reset). EV-500-1000.book 48 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 49 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español TV system setting The default setting of this system is AUTO , and unless you notice that the picture is distorted when playing some discs, you should leave it set to AUTO . If you find picture distortion with some discs, set the TV system to match your country or regionâÂÂs system. However, this may restrict the kinds of disc you can watch. See the table for the kinds of discs compatible with each setting ( AUTO , PAL and NTSC ). 1 ⢠After selecting TV SYS in step 3 above, press ENTER to change the TV system. The TV system as follows: ⢠AUTO î NTSC ⢠NTSC î PAL ⢠PAL î AUTO The system automatically switches on and youâÂÂll see the new TV system setting in the display after seeing Welcome . 2 Using and taking care of discs DVD Video regions All DVD Video discs carry a region mark that indicates which region(s) of the world the disc is compatible with. Your DVD system also has a region mark (on the rear panel). Discs from incompatible regions will not play in this player. Discs marked ALL play in any player. Disc / content format playback compatibility This player is compatible with a wide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally feature one of the following logos on the disc and/or disc packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as recordable CD and DVD, may be in an unplayable format. See the Disc compatibility table below for more information. ⢠is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd. ⢠is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation ⢠Also compatible with KODAK Picture CD This player supports the IECâÂÂs Super VCD stan- dard for superior picture quality, dual soundtracks, and widescreen support. Note 1 Most models of the newly developed countdown PAL TV system detect 50 Hz (PAL)/60 Hz (NTSC) and automatically switch vertical amplitude, resulting in a display without vertical shrinkage. However, in some cases, the image may appear without col - or. If your PAL TV does not have a V-Hold control, you may not be able to watch NTSC discs because of picture roll. If the TV h as a V-Hold control, adjust it until the picture stops rolling. On some TVs, the picture may shrink vertically, leaving black bands at the top and bottom of the screen. Disc Player setting Type Format NTSC PAL AUTO DVD/Super VCD/ Video CD/DivX Video NTSC NTSC PAL NTSC PAL NTSC PAL PAL CD/MP3/WMA/ JPEG/no disc â NTSC PAL NTSC or PAL 2 You have to switch the player into standby (press î STANDBY/ON ) before each change. DVD- Video DVD-R DVD-RW Vid e o CD Fu jicolor CD Audio CD CD-R CD-RW VIDEO CD Super Video CD (Super VCD) EV-500-1000.book 49 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 50 En Disc compatibility table About DivX DivX is a compressed digital video format created by the DivX î video codec from DivXNetworks, Inc. This player can play DivX video files burned on CD-R/RW/ROM discs. Keeping the same terminology as DVD-Video, individual DivX video files are called "Titles." When naming files/titles on a CD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabetical order. DivX video compatibility ⢠Official DivX î Certified product. ⢠Plays DivX î 5, DivX î 4, DivX î 3, and DivX î VOD video content (in compliance with DivX î Certified technical requirements). ⢠File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must be used for the player to recognize DivX video files). Note that all files with the .avi extension are recognized as MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX video files and therefore may not be playable on this player. Displaying DivX subtitle files The font sets listed below are available for DivX external subtitle files. You can see the proper font set on-screen by setting the Subtitle Language (in Language settings on page 45) to match the subtitle file. 1 This player displays subtitles for the following language groups: Media Compatible formats CD-R/RW ⢠CD-Audio, Video CD/Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* * ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible. ⢠Multi-session playback: No ⢠Unï¬Ânalized disc playback: No DVD-R/RW ⢠DVD- Video , Video Recording (VR)* * Edit points may not play exactly as edited; screen may go momentarily blank at edited points. ⢠Unï¬Ânalized playback: No ⢠WMA/MP3/JPEG ï¬Âle playback on DVD-R/RW : No PC-cre- ated disc ⢠Discs recorded using a PC may not be playable due to the setting of the software used to create the disc. In these instances, check the DVD-R/RW or CD -R/RW sof tware manual or disc boxes for more on compatibility . ⢠Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are not compatible. Com- pressed audio ⢠MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio (WMA) ⢠Sampling rates: 32, 44.1 or 48kHz ⢠Bit-rates: Any (128Kbps or higher recommended) ⢠VBR (variable bit rate) MP3 playback: No ⢠VBR WMA playback: No ⢠WMA lossless encoding: No ⢠DRM (Digital Rights Management) compatible: Y es (DRM-protected audio ï¬Âles will not play in this player). ⢠File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for the player to recognize MP3 and WMA ﬠles ⢠File structure (may differ): Up to 299 folders on a disc; up to 648 folders and ï¬Âles (combined) within each folder JPEG ï¬Âle ⢠Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2* still image ï¬Âles up to a resolution of 3072 x 2048. * File format for digital still cameras ⢠File extensions: .jpg (must be used for the player to recognize JPEG ﬠles) ⢠File structure (may differ): Up to 299 folders on a disc; up to 648 folders and ï¬Âles (combined) within each folder Media Compatible formats EV-500-1000.book 50 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 51 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Group 1: Albanian (sq), Basque (eu), Catalan (ca), Danish (da), Dutch (nl), English (en), Faroese (fo), Finnish (fi), French (fr), German (de), Icelandic (is), Irish (ga), Italian (it), Norwegian (no), Portuguese (pt), Rhaeto- Romanic (rm), Scottish (gd), Spanish (es), Swedish (sv) Group 2: Albanian (sq), Croatian (hr), Czech (cs), Hungarian (hu), Polish (pl), Romanian (ro), Slovak (sk), Slovenian (sl) Group 3: Bulgarian (bg), Byelorussian (be), Macedonian (mk), Russian (ru), Serbian (sr), Ukrainian (uk) Group 4: Hebrew (iw), Yiddish (ji) Group 5: Turkish (tr) DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivXNetworks, Inc. and are used under license. About WMA The Windows Media î logo printed on the box indicates that this player can playback Windows Media Audio content. WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by using Windows Media î Player version 7, 7.1, Windows Media î Player for Windows î XP, or Windows Media î Player 9 Series. Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/ or other countries. Handling discs Hold the disc by its edges when handling so as not to leave fingerprints, dirt or scratches on either side of the disc. Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback performance. If a disc becomes marked with fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth. Wipe lightly from the center of the disc using straight strokes. DonâÂÂt wipe the disc surface with circular strokes. If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning agents such as those designed for cleaning vinyl records. Storing discs Avoid leaving discs in excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including under direct sunlight). Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing instrument. These could all damage the disc. Discs to avoid Discs spin at high speed inside the player. If a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged, don't risk using it in your playerâ you could end up damaging the unit. This unit is designed for use with conventional, fully circular discs only. Pioneer disclaims all liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs. Note 1⢠For external subtitle files the following subtitle format filename extensions are supported (please note that these files are not shown within the disc navigation menu): .srt, .sub, .ssa, .smi ⢠Some external subtitle files may be displayed incorrectly or not at all. ⢠The filename of the movie file has to be repeated at the beginning of the filename for the external subtitle file. ⢠The number of external subtitle files which can be switched for the same movie file is limited to a maximum of 10. EV-500-1000.book 51 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 52 En Using cassette tapes The tape of a cassette is quite easily damaged and loose tape can jam in the tape deck mechanism. If the tape has become unwound, use a pen or pencil to wind it back on to the spool. When not using cassettes, always store in the case. Store cassettes away from magnetic fields, excessive heat, humidity, dust or oil. Before recording on a tape, wind the tape on past the leader tape (about the first 3 or 4 seconds of each side). Tapes you should avoid Since tapes longer than 90 minutes are so thin, they are more susceptible to jamming in the tape deck mechanism and other trouble such as irregular winding. Avoid using cassette tapes longer than 90 minutes. Protecting your recordings You can protect an important recording against accidental erasure by breaking the erase-protect tab(s) with a small screwdriver. If you want to re-record on an erase-protected cassette, cover the space left by the broken tab with self-adhesive tape. Installation and maintenance Hints on installation We want you to enjoy using this system for years to come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a location: Do... î Use in a well-ventilated room. î Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack . DonâÂÂt... î Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat-generating appliances. î Place on a window sill or other place where the system will be exposed to direct sunlight. î Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment. î Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. î Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interferenceâÂÂespecially if the television uses an indoor antenna. î Use in a kitchen or other room where the system may be exposed to smoke or steam. î Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with clothâÂÂthis may prevent proper cooling of the system unit. î Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the system unitâÂÂs feet. Erase-protect tab (For side A) Erase-protect tab (For side B) EV-500-1000.book 52 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 53 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Cleaning the pickup lens The DVD playerâÂÂs lens should not become dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer authorized service center. Although lens cleaners are commercially available, we do not recommend using them since some may damage the lens. Problems with condensation Condensation may form inside the player if it is brought into a warm room from outside, or if the temperature of the room rises quickly. Although this wonâÂÂt damage the player, it may temporarily impair performance. You should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about an hour before switching on. Moving the system unit If you need to move the main unit, first remove a disc if thereâÂÂs one in the player, then press î STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn the system off. Wait for GOOD BYE to disappear from the display, then unplug the power cord. 1 Never lift or move the unit during playbackâ discs rotate at high speeds and may damage. Resetting the system Use this procedure to reset all system settings to the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this. 1 Switch the system into standby. 2 Press and hold the î (stop) button for about 7 seconds until the display shows âÂÂMEM.CLR?â Use î or î to select it if it does not show in the display. 3 Press the î button. All the systemâÂÂs settings are now reset, and you should see Welcome in the front panel display. Note 1 Unplugging the unit before GOOD BYE disappears from the display may cause the system to return to the factory settings. EV-500-1000.book 53 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 54 En Troubleshooting Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. ⢠If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions. General Problem Remedy The power does not turn on. ⢠Connect the power plug to the wall outlet. ⢠Disconnect the power plug from the outlet, and insert again. ⢠Make sure the power source is the right voltage for the AC inlet. The power suddenly switches off automatically and wonâÂÂt switch back on for a minute or so. Also , the timer indicator is blinking. ⢠If the speaker cables arenâÂÂt connected properly , the system has a safety feature that shuts the power off automatically . Check the speaker wires to make sure theyâÂÂre connected properly . If there appears to be nothing wrong, tr y switching the power back on af ter the timer indicator has been blinking for a minute or so. ⢠If you canâÂÂt seem to switch the power back on after the timer indicator has been blinking for over a minute, the unit may be malfunctioning. T ake it to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carr y out repair work. No sound is output when a function is selected. ⢠If youâÂÂre using the LINE input, make sure the component is connected correctly (see Connecting auxiliary components on page 12). ⢠P ress MUTE on the remote control to turn muting off . ⢠Adjust the volume. No image is output when watching discs. ⢠Make sure the TV is connected correctly (see Connecting to your TV on page 11). System does not output digital audio at 96kHz. ⢠As a copy-protection measure, some DVDs do not output 96kHz audio. In this case, even if 96 kHz is selected, the player automatically outputs the audio at 48 kHz. This is not a malfunction. CanâÂÂt operate the remote control. ⢠Replace the batteries (see Loading the batteries on page 6). ⢠Operate within 23 feet (7 m), 30ð of the remote sensor on the front panel (see Range of the remote control unit on page 6). ⢠Remove the obstacle or operate from another position . ⢠Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the front panel to direct light. EV-500-1000.book 54 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 55 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español DVD/CD/Video CD player The microphone canâÂÂt be heard. ⢠Stop the disc, then restart playback. ⢠Y ou are only using one microphone and itâÂÂs plugged into the MIC (SUB) jack. The MIC (SUB) jack can only be used if there is also a microphone plugged into the MIC (MAIN) jack. ⢠Adjust the MIC VOL . F eedback noise when mic is switched on. ⢠The mic is pointing toward the speakers. Keep the mic pointed away from the speakers. ⢠The microphone level is set too high. T urn down the mic control level. SND. DEMO shows in the display and the unit canâÂÂt be controlled. ⢠P ress and hold î (stop) on the front panel for about ï¬Âve seconds. The disc tray ejects automatically to indicate the Sound Demo mode is disabled. TRAYLOCK shows in the display and the tray canâÂÂt be ejected. ⢠P ress and hold î (eject) on the front panel for about eight seconds. Then the tray can be opened/closed using î (eject). Problem Remedy Problem Remedy The disc is ejected automatically after loading. ⢠Clean the disc. ⢠Align the disc properly in the disc guide. ⢠If the region number on a DVD-video disc does not match the number on the player , the disc cannot be used (see DVD Video regions on page 49). ⢠Allow time for any condensation inside the player to evaporate. Avoid using the player near an air-conditioning unit. Playback is not possible. ⢠Disc may be loaded upside down. R eload the disc with the label side face up. P icture playback stops and the operation buttons cannot be used. ⢠P ress î , then start playback again ( î ). ⢠Switch the power off once, then on again using the front panel î STANDBY/ON button. Settings are canceled. ⢠When the power is cut due to power failure or by unplugging the power cord for several days, settings will be canceled. No picture/No color . ⢠Check that connections are correct and that plugs are inserted fully . ⢠Check the instruction manual of the TV/monitor to make sure the TV/monitor settings are incorrect. Screen is stretched or aspect does not change. ⢠The TV Screen setting is incorrect. Set the TV Screen option to match the TV/monitor you're using (see Video Output settings on page 44). When recorded on a VCR or passed through an A V selector , there is disturbance in the playback picture. ⢠Due to the player âÂÂs copy protection circuits, connection of this device through a VCR or an A V selector may prevent recording or cause picture problems. This is not a malfunction. EV-500-1000.book 55 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 56 En WMA/MP3/JPEG discs Tuner P icture disturbance during playback or dark. ⢠This player is compatible with Macro- Vision System copy guard. Some discs include a copy prevention signal, and when this type of disc is played back, stripes etc., may appear on some sections of the picture depending on the TV . This is not a malfunction. ⢠Discs respond differently to particular player functions. This may result in the screen becoming black for a brief instant or shaking slightly when the function is executed. These problems are largely due to differences between discs and disc content and are not malfunctions of this player . Noticeable difference in DVD and CD volume. ⢠DVDs and CDs use different recording methods. This is not a malfunction. Problem Remedy Problem Remedy CD-ROM disc is not recognized by the system. ⢠Make sure that the CD-ROM was recorded using the ISO 9660 disc format. See Disc / content format playback compatibility on page 49 for other disc compatibility information. Files don âÂÂt show up in the Disc Navigator/ Photo Browser . ⢠The ï¬Âles on the disc must be named with the correct ï¬Âle extension: .mp3 for MP3 ï¬Âles; .wma for WMA ï¬Âles; .jpg for JPEG ï¬Âles (upper or lower-case is OK). See Disc / content format playback compatibility on page 49 for other disc compatibility information. Problem Remedy Considerable noise in radio broadcasts. ⢠Connect the antenna (see Connecting the radio antennas on page 10). ⢠F ully extend the FM wire antenna, position for best reception, and secure to a wall. ⢠Connect an outdoor FM antenna (see Connecting external antennas on page 11). ⢠Adjust the direction and position for best reception. ⢠Connect an additional internal or external AM antenna (see Connecting the radio antennas on page 10). ⢠T urn off any other equipment that may be causing the noise or move it away from the unit. ⢠Place the antenna farther away from any other equipment that may be causing the noise. ⢠The tuning inter val is incorrect for your countr y or region. T ry switching the tuning inter val (see Frequency step setting on page 48). Auto tuning does not pick up some stations. ⢠The radio signal is weak. Auto tuning will only detect radio stations with a good signal. F or more sensitive tuning, connect an outdoor antenna. EV-500-1000.book 56 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 57 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Tape deck Error Messages Sound is mono only . ⢠Check that the tuner is not set to FM mono (see Improving FM stereo sound on page 22). Problem Remedy Problem Remedy Cannot record. ⢠Check that the cassette still has its erase-protect tabs intact, or that they are covered with self-adhesive tape ( Using cassette tapes on page 52). Sound is mufï¬Âed or previous recording is still audible underneath the new one. ⢠The tape heads may be dirty . Clean the tape heads using a head- cleaning cassette or cleaning kit. ⢠Check that youâÂÂre using a T ype I (normal) tape. Do not use T ype II (high/CrO2) or T ype IV (metal) tapes. Music search does not work ⢠The spaces between songs may be too short for music search to work. ⢠Make sure that the tape is playing when using music searchâÂÂit will not work if the tape is stopped. Recording made from the LINE input are distorted or ver y quiet. ⢠Set the line attenuator on or off as necessar y (see System Setup menu options in standby on page 48). Message Description KEY LOCK ⢠This message appears when the front panel buttons are pressed when the child lock feature is active. See Optional system settings on page 48 for more on switching on/off the child lock. RMODE ON ⢠An operation is prohibited because the line recording mode is on (see Using the Sound menu on page 27), or when recording to the tape deck. PHONES IN ⢠An operation is prohibited because headphones are connected. 96K ⢠An operation is prohibited because the source is digital 96kHz PCM. MUTING ⢠An operation is prohibited because the sound is muted. EXIT ⢠Appears brieï¬Ây when a menu is automatically exited after a set period of inactivity . NO MIC ⢠A karaoke feature is prohibited because no mic is connected. MIC IN ⢠An operation is prohibited because the mic is connected. EV-500-1000.book 57 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 58 En Screen sizes and disc formats DVD-Video discs come in different screen aspects, ranging from TV programs, which are generally 4:3, to CinemaScope widescreen movies 1 , with an aspect ratio of up to about 7:3. Televisions also come in different aspect ratios; âÂÂstandardâ 4:3 and widescreen 16:9. 2 Using the language code list Some of the language options (see Language settings on page 45) allow you to set your preferred language from any of the 136 languages listed in the Language code list . 1 Select âÂÂOther LanguageâÂÂ. 2 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) to select either a code letter or a code number. 3 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) to select a code letter or a code number. See the Language code list (next page) for a complete list of languages and codes. Note 1 Many widescreen discs override the systemâÂÂs settings so that the disc is shown in letterbox format regardless of the setting. Set to 4:3 (Letter Box), widescreen discs are shown with black bars top and bottom. Set to 4:3 (Pan&Scan) , widescreen discs are shown with the left and right sides cropped. Although the picture looks larger, you donâÂÂt actually see the whole picture. 2⢠Using the 16:9 (Wide) setting with a standard 4:3 TV, or one of the 4:3 settings with a widescreen TV, will result in distortion. ⢠When you watch discs recorded in 4:3 format, you can use the TV controls to select how the picture is presented. Your TV may offer various zoom and stretch options; see the instructions that came with your TV for details. ⢠Some movie aspect ratios are wider than 16:9, so even with a widescreen TV, these discs will still play in a âÂÂletterboxâ styl e. EV-500-1000.book 58 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 59 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Language code list Language (Language code letter), Language code Country/Area code list Country/Area, Country/Area code, Country/Area code letter Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French (fr), 0618 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 0920 Spanish (es), 0519 Dutch (nl), 1412 Russian (ru), 1821 Chinese (zh), 2608 Korean (ko), 1115 Greek (el), 0512 Afar (aa), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0315 Czech (cs), 0319 Welsh (cy), 0325 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroese (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croatian (hr), 0818 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Icelandic (is), 0919 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Javanese (jw), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambodian (km), 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laothian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmese (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Norwegian (no), 1415 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Polish (pl), 1612 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Romanian (ro), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sangho (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 1917 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swedish (sv), 1922 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 2012 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tonga (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volapük (vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yoruba (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Argentina, 0118, ar Australia, 0121, au Austria, 0120, at Belgium, 0205, be Brazil, 0218, br Canada, 0301, ca Chile, 0312, cl China, 0314, cn Denmark, 0411, dk Finland, 0609, fi France, 0618, fr Germany, 0405, de Hong Kong, 0811, hk India, 0914, in Indonesia, 0904, id Italy, 0920, it Japan, 1016, jp Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr Malaysia, 1325, my Mexico, 1324, mx Netherlands, 1412, nl New Zealand, 1426, nz Norway, 1415, no Pakistan, 1611, pk Philippines, 1608, ph Portugal, 1620, pt Russian Federation, 1821, ru Singapore, 1907, sg Spain, 0519, es Switzerland, 0308, ch Sweden, 1905, se Taiwan, 2023, tw Thailand, 2008, th United Kingdom, 0702, gb United States of America, 2119, us EV-500-1000.book 59 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 60 En Preset code list Please note that there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using. ACURA 644 ADMIRAL 631 AIWA 660 AKAI 632, 635, 642 AKURA 641 ALBA 607, 639, 641, 644 AMSTRAD 642, 644, 647 ANITECH 644 ASA 645 ASUKA 641 AUDIOGONIC 607, 636 BASIC LINE 641, 644 BAUR 631, 607, 642 BEKO 638 BEON 607 BLAUPUNKT 631 BLUE SKY 641 BLUE STAR 618 BPL 618 BRANDT 636 BTC 641 BUSH 607, 641, 642, 644, 647, 656 CASCADE 644 CATHAY 607 CENTURION 607 CGB 642 CIMLINE 644 CLARIVOX 607 CLATRONIC 638 CONDOR 638 CONTEC 644 CROSLEY 632 CROWN 638, 644 CRYSTAL 642 CYBERTRON 641 DAEWOO 607, 644, 656 DAINICHI 641 DANSAI 607 DAYTON 644 DECCA 607, 648 DIXI 607, 644 DUMONT 653 ELIN 607 ELITE 641 ELTA 644 EMERSON 642 ERRES 607 FERGUSON 607, 636, 651 FINLANDIA 635, 643, 655 FINLUX 632, 607, 645, 648, 653, 654, 655 FIRSTLINE 640, 644 FISHER 632, 635, 638, 645 FORMENTI 632, 607, 642 FRONTECH 631, 642, 646 FRONTECH / PROTECH 632 FUJITSU 648, 629 FUNAI 640, 646, 658 GBC 632, 642 GE 601, 608, 607, 610, 617, 602, 628, 618 GEC 607, 634, 648 GELOSO 632, 644 GENEXXA 631, 641 GOLDSTAR 610, 623, 621, 602, 607, 650 GOODMANS 607, 639, 647, 648, 656 GORENJE 638 GPM 641 GRAETZ 631, 642 GRANADA 607, 635, 642, 643, 648 GRADIENTE 630, 657 GRANDIN 618 GRUNDIG 631, 653 HANSEATIC 607, 642 HCM 618, 644 HINARI 607, 641, 644 HISAWA 618 HITACHI 631, 633, 634, 636, 642, 643, 654, 606, 610, 624, 625, 618 HUANYU 656 HYPSON 607, 618, 646 ICE 646, 647 IMPERIAL 638, 642 INDIANA 607 INGELEN 631 INTERFUNK 631, 632, 607, 642 INTERVISION 646, 649 ISUKAI 641 ITC 642 ITT 631, 632, 642 JEC 605 JVC 613, 623 KAISUI 618, 641, 644 KAPSCH 631 KENDO 642 KENNEDY 632, 642 KORPEL 607 KOYODA 644 LEYCO 607, 640, 646, 648 LIESENK &TTER 607 LOEWE 607 LUXOR 632, 642, 643 M -ELECTRONIC 631, 644, 645, 654, 655, 656, 607, 636, 651 MAGNADYNE 632, 649 MAGNAFON 649 MAGNAVOX 607, 610, 603, 612, 629 MANESTH 639, 646 MARANTZ 607 MARK 607 MATSUI 607, 639, 640, 642, 644, 647, 648 MEDIATOR 607 MEMOREX 644 METZ 631 MINERVA 631, 653 MITSUBISHI 609, 610, 602, 621, 631 MULTITECH 644, 649 NEC 659 NECKERMANN 631, 607 NEI 607, 642 NIKKAI 605, 607, 641, 646, 648 NOBLIKO 649 NOKIA 632, 642, 652 NORDMENDE 632, 636, 651, 652 OCEANIC 631, 632, 642 ORION 632, 607, 639, 640 OSAKI 641, 646, 648 OSO 641 OSUME 648 OTTO VERSAND 631, 632, 607, 642 PALLADIUM 638 PANAMA 646 PANASONIC 631, 607, 608,642, 622 PATHO CINEMA 642 PAUSA 644 PHILCO 632, 642 PHILIPS 631, 607, 634, 656 PHOENIX 632 PHONOLA 607 PROFEX 642, 644 PROTECH 607, 642, 644, 646, 649 QUELLE 631, 632, 607, 642, 645, 653 R -LINE 607 RADIOLA 607 RADIOSHACK 610, 623, 621, 602 RBM 653 RCA 601, 610, 615, 616, 617, 618, 661, 662, 609 REDIFFUSION 632, 642 REX 631, 646 ROADSTAR 641, 644, 646 SABA 631, 636, 642, 651 SAISHO 639, 644, 646 SALORA 631, 632, 642, 643 SAMBERS 649 SAMSUNG 607, 638, 644, 646 SANYO 635, 645, 648, 621, 614 SBR 607, 634 SCHAUB LORENZ 642 SCHNEIDER 607, 641, 647 SEG 642, 646 MCMICHAEL 634 SEI 632, 640, 649 SELECO 631, 642 SHARP 602, 619, 627 SIAREM 632, 649 SIEMENS 631 SINUDYNE 632, 639, 640, 649 SKANTIC 643 SOLAVOX 631 SONOKO 607, 644 SONOLOR 631, 635 SONTEC 607 SONY 604 SOUNDWAVE 607 STANDARD 641, 644 STERN 631 SUSUMU 641 SYSLINE 607 TANDY 631, 641, 648 TASHIKO 634 TATUNG 607, 648 TEC 642 TELEAVIA 636 TELEFUNKEN 636, 637, 652 TELETECH 644 TENSAI 640, 641 THOMSON 636, 651, 652, 663 THORN 631, 607, 642, 645, 648 TOMASHI 618 TOSHIBA 605, 602, 626, 621, 653 TOWADA 642 ULTRAVOX 632, 642, 649 UNIVERSUM 631, 607, 638, 642, 645, 646, 654, 655 VESTEL 607 VICTOR 613 VOXSON 631 WALTHAM 643 WATSON 607 WATT RADIO 632, 642, 649 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 607 YOKO 607, 642, 646 ZENITH 603, 620 PIONEER 600, 631, 632, 607, 636, 642, 651 EV-500-1000.book 60 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 61 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Specifications ⢠Amplifier section EV700/1000 model Continuous power output: Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W per channel (1kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 6 ⦠) Center . . . . . . . . . 100 W (1kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 6 ⦠) Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W per channel (1kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 6 ⦠) Subwoofer . . . . 100 W (100Hz, 10 % T.H.D., 6 ⦠) EV500 model Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W per channel (1 kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 6 ⦠) ⢠Disc section Digital audio characteristics . . . . . . . . . DVD fs: 96 kHz, 24-bit Type . . . DVD system, Video CD/Super VCD system and Compact Disc digital audio system Frequency response . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Hz to 44 kHz S/N ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 dB Dynamic range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 dB Total harmonic distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.005 % Wow and Flutter. . . . . . . . Limit of measurement (ñ0.001 % W.PEAK) or less (JEITA) ⢠Cassette deck section Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 track, 2-channel stereo Heads . . . . . . . . . . Recording/playback head x 1 Erasing head x 1 Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC servo motor x 1 Tape types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type I (Normal) ⢠FM tuner section Frequency range . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 ⦠, unbalanced ⢠AM tuner section Frequency range With 9kHz step . . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1,602 kHz With 10kHz step . . . . . . . 530 kHz to 1,700 kHz Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna ⢠Miscellaneous Power requirements Multi voltage model . . . . . AC 110-127/220-230/ 240 V (switchable), 50/60 Hz Power consumption EV700/1000 model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 W EV500 model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 W Power consumption in standby mode . . . . 0.5 W Dimensions: DVD Tuner Deck Receiver . . . . 170(W) 351.5 (H) 340.1 (D) mm Weight: DVD Tuner Deck Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 kg ⢠Accessories (Stereo DVD Tuner Deck) Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Power cord Central and South American, Taiwan, Philippines models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 All other models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Power plug adapter (Central and South American, US Military and Duty Free models only) . . . . . . 1 Video cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FM antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Dry cell batteries (AA/R6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Warranty Card (US Military and Duty Free models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 These operating instructions Speaker system ⢠Front speakers (S-EV500V/700V) Enclosure . . . . . . . . . Bass-reflex bookshelf type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm 2-way system Speakers: Woofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 cm cone type Tweeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm come type Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Hz to 20 kHz Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . 200 (W) x 351.5 (H) x 235.5 (D) mm Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 kg EV-500-1000.book 61 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 62 En ⢠Front speakers (S-EV1000V) Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passive radiator type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm 2-way system Speakers: Woofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm cone type Tweeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm come type Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Hz to 20 kHz Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 (W) x 465.5 (H) x 294 (D) mm Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 kg ⢠Center speaker (S-EV700V/1000V only) Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm 1-way system Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm cone type Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Hz to 18 kHz Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W Dimensions . . . . . 361 (W) x 108 (H) x 96 (D) mm Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.9 kg ⢠Surround speakers (S-EV700V/1000V only) Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm 1-way system Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm cone type Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Hz to 20 kHz Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W Dimensions . . . . . 190 (W) x 108 (H) x 96 (D) mm Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.75 kg ⢠Subwoofer (S-EV700V/1000V only) Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passive radiator type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm 1-way system Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm cone type Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Hz to 2 kHz Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 (W) x 351.5 (H) x 430 (D) mm Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 kg ⢠Accessories (Speaker System) Speaker cords (S-EV1000 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Speaker stands (S-EV700/1000 only) . . . . . . . . . 2 Non-skid pads (S-EV700/1000 only) . . . . . . . . . 12 Note ⢠Specifications and design subject to possible modification without notice, due to improvements. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.âÂÂDolbyâÂÂ, âÂÂPro Logicâ and the double- D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDTSâ and âÂÂDTS Digital Surroundâ are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. This product includes F ontA venueî fonts licenced by NEC corporation. F ontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is pr otected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited uses only unless other wise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback, etc. of material on devices other than the PC (or other WMA recor ding equipment) used to recor d it. F or detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC and/or software. EV-500-1000.book 62 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
<05D00001> Printed in <XRB3053-A> Published by Pioneer Corporation Copyright é2005 Pioneer Corporation All rights reserved Published by Pioneer Corporation Copyright é2005 Pioneer Corporation All rights reserved PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F . 1 1000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_A_En EV-500-1000.book 64 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT D3-4-2-1-1_En-A W ARNING This equipment is not waterproof. T o prevent a fir e or shock hazard, do not place any container filed with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_A_En W ARNING The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or r egion. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area wher e this unit will be used meets the requir ed voltage (e.g., 230V or 120V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_A_En Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully . W ARNING To prevent a fir e hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En VENTILA TION CAUTION When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to impr ove heat radiation (at least 30 cm at top, 15 cm at rear , and 15 cm at each side). W ARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are pr ovided for ventilation to ensure r eliable operation of the product, and to pr otect it from overheating. T o prevent fir e hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 úC â 35 úC ( 41 úF â 95 úF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. To ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The following caution label appears on your unit. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT D3-4-2-1-8_A_En Location: bonnet of the unit T aiwan model All other models Location: rear of the unit This product complies with the Low V oltage Directive (73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC), EMC Directives (89/336/EEC, amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC). D3-4-2-1-9a_En Recording equipment and copyright: R ecording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the countr y in which you are making a copy . Copying of copyright material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners. K018_En EV-500-1000.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Medium size screwdriver D3-4-2-1-5_En V oltage selector Y ou can find the voltage selector switch on the rear panel of multi-voltage models. The factory setting for the voltage selector is 220VâÂÂ230V . Please set it to the correct voltage for your country or region. ⢠Saudi Arabia operates on 127V and 220V mains voltage. Please set to the correct voltage before using. ⢠F or T aiwan , please set to 110VâÂÂ127V before using. ⢠F or Mexico, please set to 110VâÂÂ127V before using. Before changing the voltage, disconnect the AC power cord. Use a medium size screwdriver to change the voltage selector switch. CAUTION The ST ANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord ser ves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En CAUTION T hese speaker terminals carr y HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage . T o prevent the risk of electric shock when connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables, disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated parts. D3-4-2-2-3_A_En CAUTION : USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MA Y RESUL T IN HAZARDOUS RADIA TION EXPOSURE. CAUTION : THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD. D6-8-2-1_En NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to P art 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter ference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter ference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the inter ference by one or more of the following measures: â Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. â Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . â Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. â Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. D8-10-1-2_En Information to User Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user âÂÂs right to operate the equipment. D8-10-2_En CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment. T o prevent electromagnetic interference with electric appliances such as radios and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections. D8-10-3a_En For T aiwan exclusively T aiwanese two pin flat-bladed plug EV-500-1000.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
4 En Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so that you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them in a safe place for future reference . Contents 01 Before you start Checking whatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Loading the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Range of the remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . 6 Attaching the non-skid pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Removing the front speaker grilles . . . . . . . . 7 02 Connecting up Connecting the speaker terminals . . . . . . . . . 8 Multichannel speaker connections . . . . . . . . . 9 Hints on speaker placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Attaching the surround speakers to the speaker stands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Optional surround speaker connections . . . . 10 Connecting the radio antennas . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . 11 Connecting to your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Connecting using the component video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Connecting auxiliary components . . . . . . . . . 12 Connecting the power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 03 Controls and displays Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 04 Getting started Setting the clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . 19 Using the on-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Basic playback controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Resume and Last Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 DVD-Video disc menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Video CD/Super VCD PBC menus . . . . . . . 21 Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Improving FM stereo sound . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Listening to other sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 05 Setting up for surround sound Home theater sound setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Setting the channel levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Choosing your surround settings . . . . . . . . . 24 System Setup menu options . . . . . . . . . . . 24 06 Home theater sound About the listening modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Auto listening mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Using Front Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Listening with headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Using Advanced Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Using the Sound menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 07 Playing discs Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Playing a JPEG slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Browsing DVD or Video CD/Super VCD discs with the Disc Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Browsing WMA, MP3, DivX video and JPEG files with the Disc Navigator . . . . . . . . 29 Looping a section of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Using repeat play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Using random play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Creating a program list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Using the OSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Other functions available from the program menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Using the front panel display . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Searching a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Switching language / audio channels . . . . . . 33 Zooming the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Displaying disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 08 Using the tape deck Playing cassette tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Basic playback controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Making tape recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Automatically recording CDs (ASES) . . . . . . . 35 09 More tuner features Memorizing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Manually saving station presets . . . . . . . . . 37 Automatically saving station presets . . . . . 37 Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 EV-500-1000.book 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
5 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español 10 Singing karaoke Singing karaoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Changing the vocal mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Changing the backing track . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 11 Adjusting the sound Using the Sound menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Using the Sound Field Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Boosting the bass level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Muting the sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 12 Using the timer Setting the wake-up timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Turning the wake-up timer on/off . . . . . . . . 40 Setting the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Setting the record timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Turning the record timer on/off . . . . . . . . . . 41 13 Audio Settings and Video Adjust menu Audio Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Audio DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Virtual Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Video Adjust menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 14 Initial Settings menu Using the Initial Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Video Output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Display settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Options settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Parental Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 About DivXî VOD content . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 15 Additional information Optional system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 System Setup menu options in standby . . . 48 Using and taking care of discs . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 DVD Video regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Disc / content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Disc compatibility table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 About DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 DivX video compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 About WMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Storing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Discs to avoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Using cassette tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Tapes you should avoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Protecting your recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Problems with condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Moving the system unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 DVD/CD/Video CD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 WMA/MP3/JPEG discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Tape deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Using the language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 EV-500-1000.book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 6 En Chapter 1 Before you start Checking whatâÂÂs in the box Please check that you've received the following supplied accessories: ⢠Remote control ⢠Dry cell batteries (AA/R6) x2 ⢠Video cord ⢠AM loop antenna ⢠FM antenna ⢠Power cord: Central and South American, Taiwan, Philippines models x2 All other models x1 ⢠Speaker cords x3 (S-EV1000 only) ⢠Speaker stands x2 (S-EV700/1000 only) ⢠Non-skid pads x12 (S-EV700/1000 only) ⢠Power plug adapter (Central and South American, US Military and Duty Free models only) ⢠Warranty Card (US Military and Duty Free models only) ⢠These operating instructions Loading the batteries Use AA/R6 batteries with the supplied remote control. Make sure to follow the indications ( î , î ) inside the compartment. Important Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions: ⢠Never use new and old batteries together. ⢠Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries properly according to the marks in the battery case. ⢠Batteries with the same shape may have different voltages. Do not use different batteries together. ⢠When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instructionâÂÂs rules that apply in your country or area. Range of the remote control unit The remote control has a range of about 7 meters (23 ft). It may not work properly if: ⢠There are obstacles between the remote control and this unitâÂÂs remote sensor. ⢠Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the remote sensor. ⢠This system is located near a device that is emitting infrared rays. ⢠This unit is operated simultaneously with another infrared remote control unit. EV-500-1000.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 7 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Attaching the non-skid pads EV700/1000 model only Use the self-adhesive non-skid pads to provide a stable base for the speakers. Attach four to each speaker or stand 1 as shown below. Removing the front speaker grilles If necessary, remove the front speaker grilles as described below. 1 Gently ease the grille loose by gripping the bottom and pulling towards you. 2 Pull the top free in the same way. When reattaching, start from the top then push the bottom in until secure. ⢠It is not recommended (due to dirt and dust) to leave the speaker grilles removed. ⢠Since the speaker grilles may come loose, make sure to place the speakers in a location where they will not cause injury. Note 1 If you choose to use the Front surround 3-spot setup (as explained in Home theater sound setup on page 23), it is necessary to use the speaker stands provided (do not attach the pads to the base of the surround speakers). Using the speaker stands for the Standard surround 5-spot setup is optional. See Attaching the surround speakers to the speaker stands on page 10 for more on this. Center speaker Surround speaker Speaker stands EV-500-1000.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 8 En Chapter 2 Connecting up Important ⢠Before making or changing any connections, switch off the power and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. ⢠When making cable connections, make sure not to bend the cables over the top of this unit. This may cause a humming noise from the speakers. Connecting the speaker terminals Connect the wires from the speakers to the terminals on the main unit rear panel as shown below. Before connecting, you may want to consider the placement options available in your room, and when using this system: 1 ⢠EV500 model only â Place the front left and right speakers at equal distances from the TV, then connect them as shown below. See Optional surround speaker connections on page 10 to connect surround speakers. ⢠EV700/1000 model only â A color-coded system is provided for speaker connections (see Multichannel speaker connections below). See Home theater sound setup on page 23 for surround placement options. Caution ⢠Do not connect this speaker to any amplifier other than the one supplied with this system. Connection to any other amplifier may result in a malfunction or fire. ⢠Make sure that the bare speaker wires cannot touch each other, or come into contact with other metal parts once the unit is switched on. 1 Twist and pull off the protective shields on each wire. 2 Connect to the speaker terminals on the rear of the unit. Make sure to insert the red/colored wire into the red/colored ( ) tab and the black/white wire into the black (âÂÂ) tab. 3 EV 1000 only: Connect to the terminals on the rear of the subwoofer and front speakers in the same way. Note 1⢠The speakers supplied with this system are magnetically shielded. However, placing them extremely close to a television may result in color distortion on the screen. If this happens, move the speakers a little further away and switch off the telev ision for 15âÂÂ30 minutes. EV-500-1000.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 9 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Multichannel speaker connections EV700/1000 model only Connect each speaker using the color-coded speaker cable. Match them to the colored labels above the speaker terminals (see illustration below). *This connection is required only for the EV1000 model. Hints on speaker placement The following guidelines will help you to get the best performance from your speaker system. See Home theater sound setup on page 23 for surround placement options with this system. ⢠Place the front left and right speakers at equal distances from the TV. ⢠Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is localized at the TV screen. Caution ⢠If you choose to install the center speaker on top of the TV, be sure to secure it with putty, or by other suitable means, to reduce the risk of damage or injury resulting from the speaker falling from the TV in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes. ⢠If possible, place the surround speakers slightly above ear level. SPEAKERS L L R R SURROUND FRONT CENTER SUB WOOFER Front right* Surround right Surround left Front left* Subwoofer* Center Gray Blue White Red Purple Green EV700/1000DVD EV-500-1000.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 10 En ⢠Try not to place the surround speakers further away from the listening position than the front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect. ⢠Be sure all speakers are installed securely to prevent accidents and improve sound quality. Attaching the surround speakers to the speaker stands EV700/1000 model only If you have set up your system using the Front surround 3-spot setup (as explained in Home theater sound setup on page 23), it is necessary to use the speaker stands provided. Using the speaker stands for the Standard surround 5- spot setup is optional. Attach each speaker as shown in the steps below. 1 Line up the spurs on the speaker stand with the holes on the back of the surround speaker and press into place. 2 With the spurs fixed in place, pull the speaker downward to secure it on the stand. Optional surround speaker connections EV500 model only Using RCA speaker cables, you can connect surround speakers to the left and right SURROUND speaker jacks on the rear panel for multichannel sound from this system. For the best surround effect, place the surround speakers slightly above ear level and at the same distance from the listening position as the front speakers. Important ⢠Use speakers with a nominal impedance of at least 16 ⦠. ⢠Make sure you connect both surround speakers or you wonâÂÂt be able to hear anything from the surround jacks. Connecting the radio antennas Connecting the supplied antennas will allow you to listen to both AM and FM radio broadcasts. If you find that reception quality is poor, an outdoor antenna should give you better sound qualityâÂÂsee Connecting external antennas below for more on how to do this. 12 SURROUND L R ANTENNA AM LOOP ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75⦠3 1 2 4 6 fig. a fig. b fig. c EV-500-1000.book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 11 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español 1 Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna wires. 2 Push open the tabs, then insert one wire fully into each terminal, then release the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires. 3 Fix the AM loop antenna to the stand. To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the direction indicated by the arrow ( fig. a ) then clip the loop onto the stand ( fig. b ). ⢠If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a wall or other surface, secure the stand with screws ( fig. c ) before clipping the loop to the stand. Make sure the reception is clear. 4 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and point in the direction giving the best reception. DonâÂÂt let it come into contact with metal objects and avoid placing near computers, television sets or other electrical appliances. 1 5 Connect the FM wire antenna in the same way as the AM loop antenna. For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a wall or door frame. DonâÂÂt drape loosely or leave coiled up. Connecting external antennas External AM antenna Use 5âÂÂ6 meters of vinyl-insulated wire and set up either indoors or outdoors. Leave the AM loop antenna connected. External FM antenna Use a PAL connector to hook up an external FM antenna. Connecting to your TV This system offers three types of video connections. If your TV has component video inputs, see Connecting using the component video output below. 1 Use the supplied yellow video cable to connect the VIDEO OUT jack to a video input on your TV. For a better image, you can also use a commercially available S-Video cable to connect the S-VIDEO OUT jack to an S-Video input on your TV. 2 Optionally: Use a stereo audio cable to connect the audio outs of your TV (or VCR) to the LINE IN jacks on the rear of this unit. This will enable you to hear the TV (or VCR) sound through this system. See Connecting auxiliary components below for more on this. Note 1 The signal ground ( î ) is designed to reduce noise that occurs when an antenna is connected. It is not an electrical safety ground. ANTENNA AM LOOP ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75⦠Outdoor antenna 5âÂÂ6m Indoor antenna (vinyl-coated wire) ANTENNA AM LOOP ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75⦠PA L connector VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT EV-500-1000.book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 12 En Connecting using the component video output If your TV has component video inputs, you can use these instead of the standard or S-Video output to connect this system to your TV. 1 This should give you the best quality picture from the three types of video output available. ⢠Use a component video cable to connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT to a set of component inputs on your TV. About progressive scan video Compared to interlace video, progressive scan video effectively doubles the scanning rate of the picture, resulting in a very stable, flicker- free image. Progressive scan video is available only from the component video output. Important ⢠If you connect a TV that is not compatible with a progressive scan signal and switch the system to progressive, you will not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press î STANDBY/ON to put the system in standby, then press and hold the front panel î (stop) button for about 7 seconds until the display shows MEM.CLR? . Press the front panel î or î button so that the display shows INTERL? . Press the front panel î button to set to interlace and switch the system back on. Compatibility of this player with progressive-scan and high-definition TVs. This player is compatible with progressive video Macro Vision System Copy Guard. 2 This system is compatible with the following Pioneer displays and monitors: PDP-505HDG, PDP-435HDG, PDP-5040HD, PDP4340HD, PDP-502MX, PDP-503HDG, PDP-504HDG, PDP-433HDG, PDP-434HDG, SD-532HD5, SD533HD5. Connecting auxiliary components This system has both stereo analog inputs and outputs. Use these to connect external components, such as a VCR, MD, CD-R or DAT recorder. ⢠Connect the LINE IN jacks on the rear panel to an auxiliary playback component. These include components such as a VCR, DAT, or your TV. Connect using RCA pin-plug stereo cables. ⢠Connect the LINE OUT jacks on the rear panel to a recording component. These include components such as a cassette deck, VCR, MD recorder, or another recorder with analog inputs. Connect using RCA pin- plug stereo cables. Note 1 The component video output is switchable between interlaced and progressive formats. See Video Output settings on page 44. COMPONENT VIDEO OUT L R L R CUT LINE VIDEO OUT P R P B Y S VIDEO OUT IN COMPONENT INPUT 2 Consumers should note that not all high-definition television sets are fully compatible with this product and may cause arti- facts to be displayed in the picture. In case of 525 progressive scan picture problems, it is recommended that the user switch the connection to the âÂÂstandard definitionâ output (Interlace). If there are questions regarding our TV set compatibility with this model, please contact our customer service center. EV-500-1000.book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 13 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Connecting the power After making sure that everything is connected properly, plug in the power cord to the AC inlet, and the other end to a mains power outlet. Congratulations! YouâÂÂre done setting up. AC IN EV-500-1000.book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 14 En Chapter 3 Controls and displays Front panel Illustration shows the EV700/1000 model 1 Display See Display below. 2 Sound options FRONT SURROUND (EV700/1000 only) â Switches on the Front Surround mode (page 26). SFC (EV500 only) â Selects sound modes or custom settings from the Sound Field Control (page 39). SOUND MODE Accesses settings in the Sound menu, such as the tone controls (page 39). KARAOKE â Selects audio channels for karaoke (page 38). ENTER â Selects options or executes commands. 3 X.BOOM button Press to switch on the bass boost (page 39). 4 TIMER indicator Lights when the timer has been set (page 40). 5 î STANDBY/ON Switches the player on or into standby. 6 Function select buttons Selects the source you want to listen to. 7 VOLUME /â Adjusts the volume level. 8 Remote sensor 9 PUSH OPEN Pressing down on this side on the cassette door will open the tape deck. 10 Disc tray 11 MIC VOL and MIC input jacks Controls the volume of the karaoke mics ( MAIN and SUB ) (page 38). 12 PHONES jack Headphone jack. PHONES SUB MAIN MIC VOL MS /FF MUSIC TIMER DVD/CD TAP E LINE TUNER VOLUME STANDBY/ON MOVIE FRONT SURROUND SOUND MODE KARA OKE ENTER REVERSE MODE REC/STOP ASES PUSH OPEN â TUNING î î î MSâÂÂ/REW MIC MIN MAX î î 1 4 14 12 13 7 8 9 6 5 10 11 3 2 EV-500-1000_03_con_displays.fm 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ°´æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 15 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español 13 TUNING and playback control buttons The tuning/scan/skip buttons are used for tuning into stations, skipping or scanning tracks on discs or tapes. The playback control buttons are used for playing, pausing and stopping playback ( î ejects the disc). 14 Tape cassette controls REVERSE MODE â Selects the playback mode for tapes (page 34). REC/STOP â Starts/stops recording on the tape deck (page 35). ASES â Press for CD-to-tape synchro recording (page 35). Display 1 Character display 2 Karaoke indicators ECHO â Lights when the Karaoke ECHO effect is selected. KEY â Lights when the Karaoke pitch control is selected. KARAOKE (Vocal cancel) â Vocals in the backing track are partially eliminated using EQ. L â Left channel only. Use for tracks that have a vocal recorded in the right channel. R â Right channel only. Use for tracks that have a vocal recorded in the left channel. L R â Use to put a single-channel vocal track into the center of the mix. 3 Cassette deck indicators B.CUT â Lights when the beat cut mode has been switched to B.CUT 2 . ASES REC â Lights during ASES recording. REC â Lights when recording to the tape deck. î î â Indicates the direction of tape playback. â Indicates the reverse mode. 4 Format indicators 2 PRO LOGIC II (EV700/1000 only) â Lights during Dolby Pro Logic II decoding. 2 DIGITAL â Lights during playback of a Dolby Digital signal. DTS â Lights during playback of a DTS source. 5 Tuner indicators MONO â Lights when FM mono reception is selected. STEREO â Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo. mode TUNED â Lights when a broadcast is being received. 6 DSP indicators ADV.SURR. (EV700/1000 only) Lights when one of the Advanced or Front Surround listening modes is selected. SFC (EV500 only) Lights when one of the Sound Field Control listening modes is selected. SUB Wf ECHO B.CUT MONO AD V . SURR. SFC PGM RDM RPTâÂÂ1 LINE REC STEREO TU N ED 9 6 k H z 2 PRO LOGIC 2 DIGIT AL ASES REC DIALOGUE KEY KARA OKE L R WAK E â UP REC 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 9 10 16 EV-500-1000.book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 16 En 7 Channel indicators (EV700/1000 only) These will light according to which channels are encoded on the Dolby Digital or DTS multichannel disc currently in the player. LFE lights when the disc has an LFE channel. 8 Speaker and playback indicators The playback indicator ( î ) lights during playback, and the speaker indicators (EV700/1000 only) show which speakers are being used to output the current source. The illustrations below show some example displays. (When headphones are connected, none of the speaker indicators are lit.) 9 Playback mode indicators PGM â Lights during program play RDM â Lights during random playback RPT-1 â RPT lights during repeat play ( RPT- 1 lights during repeat one-track play) 10 96 kHz Lights when a 96kHz source is detected (may not light if the source is copyâÂÂprotected). 11 Timer indicators WAKE-UP â Lights when the wake-up timer is set. â Lights when the wake-up timer is set and flashes when it activates. REC â Lights when the record timer is set and flashes when the timer starts recording. 12 DIALOGUE (EV700/1000 only) Lights when Dialog Enhancement is on. 13 Lights when the sleep timer is active 14 Lights during multi-angle scenes on a DVD 15 LINE REC (EV700/1000 only) Lights when the line recording mode is switched on (see Using the Sound menu on page 27). 16 Level meter 5.1 channel surround sound Stereo (2.1 channel) sound 2 channel sound 5.1 channel surround sound with the Front Surround mode active SUB Wf SUB Wf SUB Wf EV-500-1000.book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 17 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Remote control Illustration shows the EV700/1000 model 1 î STANDBY/ON Switches the player on or into standby. 2 Input source function select Selects the source you want to listen to. 3 DVD control buttons AUDIO â Selects the audio channel or language (page 33). SUBTITLE â Selects a subtitle display (page 33). ANGLE â Changes the camera angle during DVD multi-angle scene playback (page 33). ZOOM â Changes the zoom level (page 33). 4 Sound Field / DSP buttons X.BOOM â Switches the bass boost on or off (page 39). SFC / SOUND FIELD (EV500 only) Selects sound modes or custom settings from the Sound Field Control (page 39). SURROUND (EV700/1000 only) â Selects a surround listening mode (page 25) ADVANCED (EV700/1000 only) â Selects an advanced listening mode (page 26) FRONT SURROUND (EV700/1000 only) â Switches on the Front Surround mode (page 26). 5 KARAOKE controls KARAOKE â Selects audio channels for karaoke (page 38). ECHO â Changes the echo level on the karaoke mics (page 38). KEY CONTROL â Lowers/raises the pitch of the backing track (page 38). 6 VOLUME Adjusts the volume level. 7 HOME MENU Press to display (or exit) the on-screen menu for Initial Settings, Play Mode functions, etc. SYSTEM SETUP ( SHIFT HOME MENU ) Use to make various system and surround sound settings (page 48 and ( EV700/1000 only ) page 24). Also used when automatically saving station presets when using the tuner (page 37). 8 ENTER , TUNE & cursor control buttons Navigates on-screen displays and menus. ENTER selects an option or executes a command. 12 3 45 6 78 90 CLEAR ENTER SYSTEM SETUP HOME MENU TOP MENU DVD MENU SHIFT CHANNEL VOL UME INPUT SUBTITLE VOLUME ANGLE ZOOM SURROUND ADVANCED FRONT SURROUND ECHO DSP AUDIO DVD/CD TAPE FM/AM LINE X.BOOM PROGRAM ST .MEMORY TEST TONE REPEAT MONO CH LEVEL RANDOM TIMER K ARAOKE I â KEYCON â i DISPLAY MUTE RETURN SOUND MODE ENTER STANDBY/ON 4 / e E / 1 á â 8 7 3 3 3 TUNE ST ST â TUNE â DVD TV CONTROL 1 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 16 17 15 13 14 4 5 EV-500-1000.book 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 18 En 9 SOUND MODE Accesses settings in the Sound menu, such as the tone controls (page 39). 10 Playback controls î â Starts/resumes playback î and îÂÂ/î â Use for reverse slow motion playback, frame reverse and reverse scanning î and î / î â Use for forward slow motion playback, frame advance and forward scanning î â Jumps to the next chapter or track î â Jumps to the beginning of the current chapter or track, then to previous chapters/tracks î â Pauses playback; press again to restart î â Stops playback 11 Number buttons and SHIFT functions The number buttons can be used for selecting tracks directly, the functions above the buttons are accessed by pressing SHIFT at the same time as the button. PROGRAM ( SHIFT 1 ) â Use to program/ play a program list (page 31). REPEAT ( SHIFT 2 ) â Selects a repeat play mode (page 30). RANDOM ( SHIFT 3 ) â Selects a random play mode (page 31). ST.MEMORY ( SHIFT 4 ) â Use for saving and listening to station presets (page 37). MONO ( SHIFT 5 ) â Press to listen to a stereo FM broadcast in mono (page 22). TIMER ( SHIFT 6 ) â Use for setting and checking the clock (page 19) and the timers (page 40). TEST TONE ( SHIFT 7 ) (EV700/1000 only) â Press to output the test tone for speaker setup (page 23). CH LEVEL ( SHIFT 8 ) (EV700/1000 only) â Use to adjust the speaker level (page 23). CLEAR â Clears an entry ENTER â Selects menu options, etc. (works exactly the same as the ENTER button in 8 above) 12 SHIFT Press to access the functions/commands written in green on the remote 13 MUTE Mutes the volume (page 39). 14 DISPLAY Switches between information displays (page 33). 15 TOP MENU Displays the top menu of a DVD disc. DVD MENU Displays the DVD menu (for Video CD/ Super VCDs, DivX video and WMA/MP3/ JPEG discs, the Disc Navigator screen appears). 16 RETURN Press to return to a previous menu screen. 17 TV CONTROL 1 î â Switches the TV on or into standby INPUT â Switches the TV input CHANNEL /â â Selects channels VOLUME /â â Adjusts the TV volume Note 1 Refer to Setting up the remote to control your TV on page 19 to use these controls with your TV. EV-500-1000.book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 19 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Chapter 4 Getting started Setting the clock Setting the clock allows you to use the timer. 1 1 Press TIMER (SHIFT 6). 2 If âÂÂCLK ADJ?â isnâÂÂt in the display, select it with î or î , then press ENTER . 3 Use î / î to set the hour. Press ENTER . 4 Use î / î to set the minute then press ENTER to confirm. Setting up the remote to control your TV You can set up the supplied remote to control your TV using the TV CONTROL buttons. 2 1 Switch on your TV. 2 Find the name of the manufacturer of your TV in the Preset Code List on page 60. Next to each manufacturer is one or more three digit codes. These tell the remote what kind of TV you have. If the name of the manufacturer of your TV does not appear in the table, you wonâÂÂt be able to set up this remote to control your TV. 3 Point the remote at your TV, hold down the CLEAR button, then enter the three digit code for your TV. The remote transmits an on/off signal to the TV. If youâÂÂve entered the correct code, your TV should switch off. If your TV doesnâÂÂt turn off, repeat the procedure using the next code in the list until your TV switches off successfully. Once set, you can then use the individual TV controls shown below. Using the on-screen displays For ease of use, this system makes extensive use of graphical on-screen displays (OSDs). All the screens are navigated in basically the same way, using the cursor buttons ( î , î , î , î ) to change the highlighted item and pressing ENTER to select it. 3 Note 1 The default setting is 12-hour format. See Optional system settings on page 48 to change it. 2⢠The default setting is for a Pioneer TV. ⢠Note that there are also cases where the codes listed for a manufacturer in the Preset Code List may not work for your TV. SYSTEM SETUP HOME MENU TOP MENU DVD MENU RETURN SOUND MODE ENTER TUNE ST ST â TUNE â 3 45 6 78 9 0 ENTER SHIFT CHANNEL VOLUME INPUT ST.MEMORY TEST TONE MONO CH LEVEL TIMER TV CONTROL Button What it does î Switches your TV on or into standby . CHANNEL /â Changes the TV channel. VOLUME Adjusts the volume. INPUT Switches the TVâÂÂs input between the built in TV tuner and an external video source. 3 The screen saver will appear after five minutes of inactivity. EV-500-1000.book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 20 En Important ⢠Throughout this manual, âÂÂSelectâ means use the cursor buttons to highlight an item on-screen, then press ENTER . Tip ⢠The button guide at the bottom of every OSD screen shows you which buttons youâÂÂll need to use for that screen. Playing discs The basic playback controls for playing DVD, CD, Video CD/Super VCD, DivX video and MP3/ WMA discs are covered here. Further functions are detailed in chapter 7. 1 If the player isnâÂÂt already on, switch it on. If youâÂÂre playing a DVD, Video CD/Super VCD or DivX video, also turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the correct video input. 2 Press î on the front panel to load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if youâÂÂre loading a double-sided DVD disc, load it with the side you want to play face down). 3 Press î (play) to start playback. If youâÂÂre playing a DVD or Video CD/Super VCD, a menu may appear. See DVD-Video disc menus on page 21 and Video CD/Super VCD PBC menus on page 21 to navigate these. If youâÂÂre playing a DivX video or WMA/MP3 disc, it may take a few seconds before playing. If you loaded a CD/CD-R/RW containing JPEGs, a slideshow will start. See Playing a JPEG slideshow on page 28 for more on this. ⢠If a disc contains a mixture of DivX video and other media file types (MP3, for example), first select whether to play the DivX video files ( DivX ) or the other media file types ( MP3 / WMA / JPEG ) from the on- screen display. 4 Adjust the volume. Use the VOLUME /â control. Basic playback controls The following table shows the basic controls on the remote for playing discs 1 . You can find other playback features in the chapter 7. Button What it does HOME MENU Displays/exits the on-screen display îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî Changes the highlighted menu item ENTER Selects the highlighted menu item RETURN Returns to the main menu without saving changes Note 1 You may find with some DVD discs that some playback controls donâÂÂt work in certain parts of the disc. Button What it does î Starts/resumes normal playback. ⢠If the display shows RESUME or LAST MEM playback starts from the resume or last memor y point (see Resume and Last Memory below). î P auses/unpauses a disc. î Stops playback or cancels the resume function (if the display shows RESUME ). î P ress to start fast reverse scanning. î P ress to start fast forward scanning. î Skips to the start of the current track or chapter , then previous tracks/chapters. î Skips to the next track or chapter . EV-500-1000.book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 21 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Resume and Last Memory When you stop playback of a disc, RESUME shows in the display indicating that you can resume playback from that point. With DVDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, even if ejected, the play position is stored in memory. 1 The next time you load the disc, the display shows LAST MEM and you can resume playback. If you want to clear the resume point, press î (stop) while RESUME is displayed. DVD-Video disc menus Many DVD-Video discs contain menus from which you can select what you want to watch. Sometimes DVD-Video menus are displayed automatically when you start playback; others only appear when you press DVD MENU or TOP MENU ( SHIFT DVD MENU ). Video CD/Super VCD PBC menus Some Video CD/Super VCDs have menus from which you can choose what you want to watch. These are PBC (Playback control) menus. You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD without having to navigate the PBC menu by starting playback using a number button to select a track, rather than the î (play) button. Listening to the radio The tuner can receive both FM and AM broadcasts, and lets you memorize your favorite stations so you donâÂÂt have to manually tune in every time you want to listen (see More tuner features on page 37 for more on this). 1 Press FM/AM to switch to the tuner, then press repeatedly to select the AM or FM band. The display shows the band and frequency. 2 Tune to a frequency. There are three tuning modesâÂÂmanual, auto, and high-speed: Numbers Use to enter a title/chapter/track number . P ress ENTER to select. ⢠If the disc is stopped, playback starts from the selected title (for DVD) or track (for CD/Video CD/Super VCD). ⢠If the disc is playing, playback jumps to the start of the selected title (VR mode DVD-RW), chapter (DVD - Video) or track (CD/Video CD/Super VCD). Note 1⢠The Last Memory function may not work with some discs. ⢠For DVD-Video discs (except VR mode DVD-RW), the player stores the play position of the last five discs. Button What it does TOP MENU ( SHIFT DVD MENU ) Displays the âÂÂtop menuâ of a DVD discâÂÂthis varies with the disc. DVD MENU Displays a DVD disc menuâÂÂthis varies with the disc and may be the same as the âÂÂtop menuâÂÂ. îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî Moves the cursor around the screen. Button What it does ENTER Selects the current menu option. RETURN Returns to the previously displayed menu screen. Numbers Highlights a numbered menu option (some discs only). P ress ENTER to select. Button What it does RETURN Displays the PBC menu. Numbers Selects numbered menu options. P ress ENTER to select. î Displays the previous menu page (if there is one). î Displays the next menu page (if there is one). Button What it does EV-500-1000.book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 22 En ⢠Manual tuning : Press TUNE /â repeatedly to change the displayed frequency. ⢠Auto tuning : Press and hold TUNE /â until the frequency display starts to move, then release. The tuner will stop on the next station it finds. Repeat to keep searching. ⢠High-speed tuning : Press and hold TUNE /â until the frequency display starts to move rapidly. Keep the button held down until you reach the frequency you want. If necessary, fine tune the frequency using the manual tuning method. Improving FM stereo sound If youâÂÂre listening to an FM station in stereo but the reception is weak, you can improve the sound quality by switching to mono. ⢠Press MONO ( SHIFT 5) to choose âÂÂFM MONO?â then press ENTER . The MONO indicator lights when the tuner is in mono reception mode. Select FM AUTO? above to switch back to auto- stereo mode (the STEREO indicator lights when receiving a stereo broadcast). Listening to other sources You can connect an external source for playback through this systemâÂÂs speakers. See Connecting auxiliary components on page 12 for more on this. 1 Make sure that the external source (TV, MD player, etc.) is switched on. 2 Press LINE to select the source connected to the rear panel LINE input. 3 If necessary, start playback of the source. Tip ⢠If an auxiliary source is producing unpleasant distortion from the speakers, you can reduce the signal level by switching on the attenuator. See Optional system settings on page 48 to do this. EV-500-1000.book 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Setting up for surround sound 05 23 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Chapter 5 Setting up for surround sound EV700/1000 model only Home theater sound setup Depending on the size and characteristics of your room, you can place your speakers in one of two ways using this system: 1 ⢠Standard surround 5-spot setup â This is a standard multichannel surround sound speaker setup for optimal 5.1 channel home theater sound. ⢠Front surround 3-spot setup â This setup is ideal when rear surround speaker placement isn't possible or you want to avoid running long speaker cables in your listening area. Use this setup together with the Front Surround modes to take advantage of wall and ceiling reflections for a very realistic surround effect. After placing your speakers, complete Setting the channel levels then refer to Speaker distance setting on the next page to complete your surround sound setup. Setting the channel levels Set the relative channel levels from your main listening position. 2 1 Press TEST TONE ( SHIFT 7). The test tone is output in the following order (from the speakers active in the current listening mode): ⢠L â Front left speaker ⢠C â Center speaker ⢠R â Front right speaker ⢠RS â Surround right speaker ⢠LS â Surround left speaker ⢠SW â Subwoofer 3 2 Use the VOLUME /â button to adjust the volume to an appropriate level. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to adjust the speaker levels in turn. You should hear the test tone at the same volume from each speaker when seated in the main listening position. The channel level range is ñ 10 dB. 4 When youâÂÂre done, press TEST TONE to exit test tone setup. Note 1 See About the listening modes on page 25 for more on using the different listening modes with each speaker setup. Fr o nt left Surround left Listening position Center Subwoofer Fr ont right Surround right Fr o nt left Fr o nt right Surround left Surround right Listening position Center Subwoofer 2⢠Make sure headphones are unplugged. ⢠The channel balance can be adjusted (independently for each listening mode) while listening to any sound source you want: Press CH LEVEL ( SHIFT 8 ) then use îÂÂ/î to select channels and îÂÂ/î to adjust the level. Press ENTER when youâÂÂre finished. 3 Since the subwoofer produces ultra-low frequencies its sound may seem quieter than it actually is. EV-500-1000.book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Setting up for surround sound 05 24 En Choosing your surround settings To get the best possible surround sound from your system, make the settings below. You should only need to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your speakers or wish to change settings for a particular disc). 1 Press SYSTEM SETUP (SHIFT HOME MENU). 1 2 Use îÂÂ/î to choose the setting. The current setting is shown for each option as you cycle through the display. See below for a full list and description of each. 3 Use îÂÂ/î to adjust. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for other settings. 5 When youâÂÂre done, press ENTER to leave the System Setup menu. System Setup menu options Below are all the available settings in the setup menu. 2 The first setting in each section is the default. See also the notes in each section for additional information about the settings. Speaker distance setting Specifies the distance from your listening position to your speakers. When DIST.? appears, press ENTER , then use îÂÂ/î to adjust the distance, and îÂÂ/î to switch between the following speakers: ⢠L â Front left speaker ⢠C â Center speaker ⢠R â Front right speaker ⢠RS â Surround right speaker ⢠LS â Surround left speaker ⢠SW â Subwoofer Each speaker can be adjusted between 0.3m ~ 9m . The default setting is 3m . Dynamic Range Control Specifies dynamic range adjustment to Dolby Digital or DTS soundtracks: 3 ⢠DRC OFF â No dynamic range adjustment (use when listening at higher volume) ⢠DRC MID â Mid setting ⢠DRC HIGH â Dynamic range is reduced (loud sounds are reduced in volume while quieter sounds are increased) LFE attenuator setting Dolby Digital and DTS audio sources include ultra-low bass tones. Set the LFE attenuator as needed to prevent the ultra-low bass from distorting the sound. ⢠LFEATT 0 â No attenuation ⢠LFEATT 10 â LFE channel attenuated 10dB ⢠LFE Off â LFE channel is not played Subwoofer setting You can switch between subwoofer settings to provide extra bass or to hear the subwoofer channel âÂÂas isâÂÂ. ⢠SW PLUS â This provides extra bass when listening to an audio source ⢠SW AUTO â The subwoofer channel is heard without any additional processing. DTS CD setting If you play a DTS-encoded CD, you will need to change this setting to hear the decoded signal. When CD TYPE? appears, press ENTER , then use îÂÂ/î to select the setting: ⢠NORM.CD â Regular CD playback, DTS- encoded CDs may output some noise ⢠DTS-CD â Proper decoding of DTS- encoded CDs, but regular CD playback may lose quality Note 1 These settings canâÂÂt be changed when recording, or when the Line Recording feature is on (see Using the Sound menu on page 27). 2 If the tuner is selected, the auto preset feature also appears (see Automatically saving station presets on page 37). 3 This setting works only with Dolby Digital and some DTS soundtracks. EV-500-1000.book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Home theater sound 06 25 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Chapter 6 Home theater sound EV700/1000 model only About the listening modes As explained in Home theater sound setup on page 23, there are two basic surround speaker setup options available. Of course you can select any of the listening modes regardless of how you place your speakers, but you will achieve the best surround effect by using the listening modes in conjunction with your speaker setup: ⢠Standard surround 5-spot setup â Use the Standard ( Listening in surround sound on page 25) and Advanced ( Using Advanced Surround on page 26) surround listening modes 1 with this setup. ⢠Front surround 3-spot setup â See Using Front Surround on page 26 for the options 1 available with this speaker setup. Make sure you have completed Setting the channel levels on page 23. For a more detailed surround sound setup, see Choosing your surround settings on page 24. Auto listening mode The Auto listening mode is the simplest way to listen to any source as it was mastered: the output from the speakers mirrors the channels in the source material. ⢠Press SURROUND to select the AUTO listening mode. Listening in surround sound You can listen to stereo or multichannel sources in surround sound. Surround sound is generated from stereo sources using one of the Dolby Pro Logic decoding modes. ⢠Press SURROUND repeatedly to select a listening mode. The choices that appear in the display will vary according to the type of source thatâÂÂs playing. ⢠AUTO â Auto listening mode (see above) ⢠DOLBY DIGITAL / DTS â Dolby Digital or DTS decoding (depending on the source). 2 For a multichannel source, this will be the same as AUTO . ⢠PROLOGIC (Dolby Pro Logic) â 4.1 channel surround sound for use with any two- channel source ⢠MOVIE (Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) â Pro Logic II 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to movie sources (use with any two-channel source) ⢠MUSIC (Dolby Pro Logic II Music) â Pro Logic II 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to music sources, for use with any two-channel source ⢠STEREO â See Listening in stereo below Note 1 These listening modes do not work with 96kHz sources. SUBTITLE ANGLE ZOOM SURROUND ADVANCED FRONT SURROUND ECHO DSP AUDIO X.BOOM K ARAOKE I â KEYCON â i DISPLAY MUTE DVD 2 When listening in DOLBY DIGITAL / DTS mode, two-channel material will automatically be played in surround sound using Dolby Pro Logic II decoding. SUBTITLE ANGLE ZOOM SURROUND ADVANCED FRONT SURROUND ECHO DSP AUDIO X.BOOM K ARAOKE I â KEYCON â i DISPLAY MUTE DVD EV-500-1000.book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Home theater sound 06 26 En Using Front Surround The Front Surround modes are effective when you are using the Front surround 3-spot speaker setup as described in Home theater sound setup on page 23. The surround speakers should be placed on top of the front speakers and oriented (about 60ú) towards the walls (as a guide, line up the edge of the speaker stand base with the front edge of the speaker as shown below). You can adjust the amount of Front Surround effect in Using the Sound menu on page 27. ⢠Press FRONT SURROUND to select an Front Surround mode. Press repeatedly to select from: ⢠FRT MOVIE â The Front Surround Movie mode gives a movie theater-type sound. ⢠FRT MUSIC â The Front Surround Music mode gives a concert hall-type sound. ⢠EXT POWER â The Extra Power mode gives additional energy to stereo sources. Listening in stereo You can listen to any sourceâÂÂstereo or multichannelâÂÂin stereo. When playing a multichannel source, all channels are downmixed to the front left/right speakers and the subwoofer. ⢠Press SURROUND repeatedly until STEREO shows in the display. Listening with headphones When headphones are connected, only the STEREO mode is available. 1 Using Advanced Surround The Advanced Surround modes can be used with any multichannel or stereo source for a variety of additional surround sound effects. 2 You can adjust the amount of effect applied in Using the Sound menu on page 27. ⢠Press ADVANCED to select an Advanced Surround mode. Press repeatedly to select from: ⢠ADV MOVIE â Gives a movie theater-type sound ⢠ADV MUSIC â Gives a concert hall-type sound ⢠EXPANDED â Creates an extra wide surround field 60ú 60ú Left speaker Right speaker î î SUBTITLE ANGLE ZOOM SURROUND ADVANCED FRONT SURROUND ECHO DSP AUDIO X.BOOM K ARAOKE I â KEYCON â i DISPLAY MUTE DVD Note 1 When you disconnect them it reverts to the previous mode. 2 The Standard surround setup described in Home theater sound setup on page 23 should be used with these effects. SUBTITLE ANGLE ZOOM SURROUND ADVANCED FRONT SURROUND ECHO DSP AUDIO X.BOOM K ARAOKE I â KEYCON â i DISPLAY MUTE DVD SUBTITLE ANGLE ZOOM SURROUND ADVANCED FRONT SURROUND ECHO DSP AUDIO X.BOOM K ARAOKE I â KEYCON â i DISPLAY MUTE DVD EV-500-1000.book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Home theater sound 06 27 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español ⢠TV SURR. â Designed for mono or stereo TV broadcasts and other sources ⢠SPORTS â Designed for sports and other programs based on commentary ⢠GAME â Creates surround sound from video game sources ⢠5 STEREO â Designed to give powerful surround sound to stereo music sources Using the Sound menu There are several optional sound settings you can make from the sound menu. 1 Press SOUND MODE . 2 Use îÂÂ/î to choose the setting you want to adjust. The current setting is shown for each option (in the order shown in step 3, with the defaults in bold ) as you cycle through the display. 3 Use îÂÂ/î to adjust. Make adjustments to the following settings: 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for other settings. 5 When youâÂÂre done, press ENTER to leave the Sound menu. Setting What it does Option(s) Bass Adjusts the amount of bass. âÂÂ4 to 4 Treble Adjusts the amount of treble. âÂÂ4 to 4 Effect Sets the effect level for the currently selected Advanced or Front Surround mode (each mode can be set separately). 10 to 90 Dialog Enhancement (Press ENTER in step 2 to access) Localizes dialog in the center channel to make it stand out from other background sounds in a TV or movie soundtrack. OFF MAX MID SYSTEM SETUP HOME MENU TOP MENU DVD MENU RETURN SOUND MODE ENTER TUNE ST ST â TUNE â Center Width a Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center channel between the front right and left speakers, making it sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings). 0 to 7 Default: 3 Dimension a Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back, making the sound more distant (minus settings), or more forward (positive settings). âÂÂ3 to 3 Default: 0 Panorama a Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a âÂÂwraparoundâ effect. OFF ON Line Recording b (Press ENTER in step 2 to access) To record a surround- compatible downmix (left- total/right-total, or Lt/Rt) of a Dolby multichannel source (such as a DVD) from the line outputs of this system, switch this feature on. This enables improved playback with systems that can provide matrix-decoding (like Dolby Pro Logic). Switch to OFF for a simple stereo downmix (left- only/right-only, or Lo/Ro, which is suitable for playback on a two-channel stereo system or on headphones). OFF ON a. Only available when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode. b. ⢠When the Line Recording mode is on, most sound features cannot be used. The display will briefly blink RMODE ON if you try and use a prohibited function. ⢠This mode automatically switches off if you change the in- put function ( DVD/CD , TUNER , etc.) or switch the power off. ⢠When the Line Recording mode is off, audio from the an- alog output may be interrupted, depending on the operation. Setting What it does Option(s) EV-500-1000_05_home_theater.fm 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 07 28 En Chapter 7 Playing discs Important ⢠Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to DVD discs, Video CDs/ Super VCDs, CDs, DivX video and WMA/ MP3/JPEG discs, although the exact operation of some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. ⢠Some DVDs restrict the use of some functions (random or repeat, for example) in some or all parts of the disc. This is not a malfunction. ⢠When playing Video CD/Super VCDs, some of the functions are not available during PBC playback. If you want to use them, start the disc playing using a number button to select a track. Scanning discs You can fast-scan discs forward or backward at various different speeds. 1 ⢠During playback, press î or î to start scanning. Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed (shown on-screen). ⢠To resume playback, press î (play). 2 Playing in slow motion You can play DVDs, Video CD/Super VCDs and DivX video at four different forward slow motion speeds. DVD discs can also be played in reverse slow motion. 1 During playback, press î (pause). 2 Press and hold î or î until slow motion playback starts. Press repeatedly to change the slow motion speed (shown on-screen). ⢠To resume playback, press î (play). 2 Frame advance/frame reverse You can advance or back up DVD discs frame- by-frame. With Video CD/Super VCDs and DivX video you can only use frame advance. 1 During playback, press î (pause). 2 Press î or î to reverse or advance a frame at a time. ⢠To resume playback, press î (play). 2 Playing a JPEG slideshow After loading a CD/CD-R/RW containing JPEG pictures, press î to start a slideshow from the first folder/picture on the disc. 3 The player displays the pictures in each folder in alphabet- ical order. Pictures are automatically adjusted so that they fill as much of the screen as possible. While the slideshow is running: Note 1 Only one speed is available for DivX video discs. 2⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. ⢠With Video CD/Super VCDs in PBC mode or a WMA/MP3 track, playback automatically resumes at the end or beginning of the track. 3⢠The time it takes for the player to load a file increases with large file sizes. Button What it does î P auses the slideshow ; press again to restart. î Displays the previous picture. EV-500-1000.book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 07 29 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Browsing DVD or Video CD/ Super VCD discs with the Disc Navigator Use the Disc Navigator to browse through the contents of a DVD or Video CD/Super VCD disc to find the part you want to play. 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on- screen menu. 2 Select a view option. The options available depend on the kind of disc loaded and whether the disc is playing or not, but include: ⢠Title â Titles from a DVD-Video disc. ⢠Chapter â Chapters from the current title of a DVD-Video disc. ⢠Track â Tracks from a Video CD/Super VCD disc. ⢠Time â Thumbnails from a Video CD/Super VCD disc at 10 minute intervals. ⢠Original: Title â Original titles from a VR mode DVD-RW disc. ⢠Playlist: Title â Playlist titles from a VR mode DVD-RW disc. ⢠Original: Time â Thumbnails from the Original content at 10 minute intervals. ⢠Playlist: Time â Thumbnails from the Playlist at 10 minute intervals. The screen shows up to six moving thumbnail images displayed one after another. To display the previous/next six thumbnails, press î / î . 3 Select the thumbnail image for what you want to play. You can use either the cursor buttons ( îÂÂ/îÂÂ/ îÂÂ/î ) and ENTER to select a thumbnail, or the number buttons. To select using the number buttons, enter a two-digit number then press ENTER . Browsing WMA, MP3, DivX video and JPEG files with the Disc Navigator Use the Disc Navigator to find a particular file or folder by filename. î Displays the next picture. îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î P auses the slideshow and rotates/ï¬Âips the displayed picture. (P ress î (play) to restart slideshow). ZOOM P auses the slideshow and zooms the picture. P ress again to toggle between 1x, 2x and 4x zoom. (P ress î (play) to restart slideshow). DVD MENU Displays the Disc Navigator screen (see below). Button What it does Disc Navigator Disc Navigator Title Chapter 01 04 02 05 03 06 Disc Navigator: Title 01- 49: - - EV-500-1000.book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 07 30 En 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on-screen menu. 2 Use the cursor buttons ( îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ) and ENTER to navigate. Use the cursor up/down buttons ( îÂÂ/î ) to move up and down the folder/file list. Use the cursor left button ( î ) to return to the parent folder. 1 Use ENTER or cursor right ( î ) to open a highlighted folder. ⢠When a JPEG file is highlighted, a thumbnail image is displayed on the right. 3 To play the highlighted track or DivX video file or display the highlighted JPEG file, press ENTER. ⢠When a WMA/MP3 or DivX video file is selected, playback begins from that file, and continues until the end of the folder. ⢠When a JPEG file is selected, a slideshow begins, starting with that file, and continues to the end of the folder. Tip ⢠To play the contents of the whole disc rather than just the current folder, exit the Disc Navigator and start playback using the î (play) button. Looping a section of a disc The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points (A and B) within a track (CD, Video CD/Super Video CD) or title (DVD) that form a loop which is played over and over. 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select â Play Mode âÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂA-B RepeatâÂÂ. 2 3 Press ENTER on âÂÂA(Start Point)â to set the loop start point. 4 Press ENTER on âÂÂB(End Point)â to set the loop end point. After pressing ENTER , playback jumps back to the start point and plays the loop. 5 To resume normal playback, select âÂÂOffâÂÂ. Using repeat play In addition to various repeat play options, itâÂÂs also possible to use repeat play together with program play (see Creating a program list on page 31). 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select â Play Mode âÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂRepeatâ then select a repeat play option. 3 If program play is active, select Program Repeat to repeat the program list, or Repeat Off to cancel. Note 1 You can also do this by going to the â .. â folder at the top, then pressing ENTER . 00:00 / 00:00 0kbps Folder1 Folder2 Folder3 Folder4 File1 File2 File3 File4 File5 Folder 2 00:00 / 00:00 0kbps 2 You canâÂÂt use repeat play with WMA/MP3 discs. 3 You canâÂÂt use A-B Repeat play with WMA/MP3 or DivX video discs. EV-500-1000.book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 07 31 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español ⢠For DVD discs, select Title Repeat , Chapter Repeat or Repeat Off . ⢠For CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select Disc Repeat , Track Repeat or Repeat Off . ⢠For DivX video discs, select Repeat Title (or Repeat Off ). Tip ⢠You can also use the REPEAT ( SHIFT 2 ) button on the remote to select a repeat play option. The repeat modes available are the same as those from the Play Mode menu. Using random play Use this function to play titles or chapters (DVD-Video) or tracks (CD and Video CD/Super VCD) in a random order. 1 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select â Play Mode âÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂRandomâ then select an option. ⢠For DVD discs, select Random Title , Random Chapter or Random Off . ⢠For CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select On or Off to switch random play on or off. Tip ⢠Use the following controls during random play: ⢠You can also use the RANDOM ( SHIFT 3 ) button on the remote to select a random play mode. The random modes available are the same as when choosing from the Play Mode menu. Press ENTER to start random play. ⢠Random play remains in effect until you select Random Off from the random play menu options. Creating a program list This feature lets you program the play order of titles/chapters/tracks on a disc. 2 Using the OSD 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select â Play Mode âÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂProgramâ then select âÂÂCreate/Editâ from the list of program options. 3 Use the cursor buttons and ENTER to select a title, chapter or track for the current step in the program list. For a DVD disc, you can add a title or a chapter. ⢠For a CD or Video CD/Super VCD, select a track to add to the program list. After pressing ENTER to select the title/ chapter/track, the step number automatically moves down one. 4 Repeat step 3 to build up a program list. A program list can contain up to 24 steps. Note 1⢠You can set the random play option when a disc is playing or stopped. However, you can't use random play together with program. ⢠You canâÂÂt use random play with VR format DVD-RW discs, WMA/MP3 discs, DivX video discs, or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. Button What it does î Selects a new track/title/chapter at random. î Returns to the beginning of the current track/title/chapter; further presses select another random track/title/chapter. 2 You canâÂÂt use Program play with VR format DVD-RW discs, WMA/MP3 discs, DivX video discs, or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. Button What it does EV-500-1000.book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 07 32 En ⢠You can insert steps by just highlighting the position where you want the new step to appear and entering a title/chapter/track number. ⢠To delete a step, highlight it and press CLEAR . 5 To play the program list, press î (play). Program play remains active until you turn off program play (see below), erase the program list (see below), eject the disc or switch off. Tip ⢠Use the following controls during program play: Other functions available from the program menu There are a number of other options in the program menu in addition to Create/Edit. ⢠Playback Start â Starts playback of a saved program list ⢠Playback Stop â Turns off program play, but does not erase the program list ⢠Program Delete â Erases the program list and turns off program play Using the front panel display Even though the OSD is available for CDs, the front panel display provides information to make a program list easily. If a disc is playing, stop it first. 1 Press PROGRAM (SHIFT 1). YouâÂÂre prompted to enter a track for the first step in the program list. 2 Use the number buttons to select a track, then press ENTER . If you make a mistake, press CLEAR to delete the last (most recently) programmed track. 3 Repeat step 2 to build up a program list. A program list can contain up to 24 steps. 4 To play the program list, press î (play). ⢠Program play remains active until you press î (stop), clear the playlist (see tip above), eject the disc or switch off the player. Searching a disc You can search DVD discs by title or chapter number, or by time; CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs by track number or time; DivX video discs by time. 1 Press HOME MENU and select â Play Mode âÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂSearch ModeâÂÂ. The search options that appear depend on the kind of disc loaded. 3 Select a search mode. ⢠The disc must be playing in order to use time search. 4 Use the number buttons to enter a title, chapter or track number, or a time. ⢠For a time search, enter the number of minutes and seconds into the currently playing title (DVD/ DivX video) or track (CD/ Video CD/Super VCD) you want playback to resume from. For example, press 4 , 5 , 0 , 0 to have playback start from 45 minutes into the disc. For 1 hour, 20 minutes and 30 seconds, press 8 , 0 , 3 , 0 . 5 Press ENTER to start playback. Button What it does HOME MENU Save the program list and exit without starting playback. î Skip to the next step in the program list. EV-500-1000.book 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 07 33 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Switching subtitles Some DVD discs and DivX video discs have subtitles in one or more languages; the disc box will usually tell you which subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle language during playback. 1 ⢠Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a subtitle option. ⢠To set subtitle preferences, see Language settings on page 45. ⢠See Displaying DivX subtitle files on page 50 for more on DivX subtitles. Switching language / audio channels When playing discs recorded with dialog in two or more languages, or with dual-mono audio 2 you can switch these during playback. 3 ⢠Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an audio language option. ⢠To set audio language preferences, see Language settings on page 45. Zooming the screen Using the zoom feature you can magnify a part of the screen by a factor of 2 or 4, while watching a DVD, DivX video title or Video CD/ Super VCD or playing a JPEG disc. 1 During playback, use the ZOOM button to select the zoom factor (Normal, 2x or 4x). 2 Use the cursor buttons to change the zoomed area. You can change the zoom factor and the zoomed area freely during playback. 4 Switching camera angles Some DVD discs feature scenes shot from two or more anglesâÂÂcheck the disc box for details. When a multi-angle scene is playing, a icon appears on screen (this can be switched off if you preferâÂÂsee Display settings on page 45). ⢠During playback (or when paused), press ANGLE to switch angle. Displaying disc information Various track, chapter and title information can be displayed on-screen during playback. ⢠To show/switch/hide the information displayed, press DISPLAY repeatedly. Limited disc information also appears in the front panel display. Press DISPLAY to change the displayed information. Note 1 Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU or DVD MENU to access. 2 Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks. With these discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as well as individual channels in each. 3 Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU or DVD MENU to access. 4⢠Since DVD, Video CD/Super VCD, DivX video title and JPEG pictures have a fixed resolution, picture quality will deteriorate, especially at 4x zoom. This is not a malfunction. ⢠If the navigation square at the top of the screen disappears, press ZOOM again to display it. EV-500-1000.book 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the tape deck 08 34 En Chapter 8 Using the tape deck Playing cassette tapes This unit has a tape deck that can be used for both recording and playback. In addition, it features automatic music search (AMS) and auto-reverse functions 1 . See Making tape recordings below for more features. 1 Push down on the cassette door where indicated to open it and insert a tape. 2 Close the cassette door. 3 Press REVERSE MODE (front panel only) to select the reverse mode. Press repeatedly to choose between: ⢠î â Single side playback ⢠î â Auto-reverse playback: stops after finishing playback in the âÂÂreverseâ ( î ) direction ⢠î â Continuous playback (up to 16 complete plays) 4 Press TAPE to start playback. You can also press îÂÂî (remote) or î (front panel) to start playback when TAPE is selected. The side of the tape youâÂÂll hear is whichever is face up when you load it. This is the âÂÂforwardâ ( î ) direction, while the other side is âÂÂreverseâ ( î ). The direction indicator is shown in the display. Basic playback controls The following table shows the basic controls on the remote for playing discs. Note 1 The auto-reverse feature lets you play or record a tape without physically taking it out and turning it over. Button What it does TAPE ( îÂÂî ) Starts/resumes normal playback. Each time you press either button during playback, the other side of the tape starts playing. Pressing TAPE ( îÂÂî ) when the tape is stopped starts playback on the side it was playing previously. î P auses playback. î Stops playback. Also resets the tape counter to 0000 if pressed when the tape is already stopped. î P ress to fast-rewind a tape. î P ress to fast-forward a tape. î / î a a. Track search is unlikely to work reliably if: â the space between tracks is less than about 4 seconds. â the recording is noisy so the spaces are not recognized. â the recording contains frequent silences, such as a lan- guage study tape. â the recording contains sections of very quiet material, such as some classical music recordings. Searches for the previous / next blank space between tracks on the side currently playing (in other words, to the start of the current / next track), then resumes playback. By pressing more than once, the tape will skip several tracks at once (up to a maximum of 15). For example, press î twice to skip forward two tracks. EV-500-1000.book 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the tape deck 08 35 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Making tape recordings You can make tape recordings from the radio, CDs, or from an external component connected to the auxiliary inputs. 1 If you're recording from CD itâÂÂs convenient to use the ASES modeâÂÂsee Automatically recording CDs (ASES) below. Unlike some tape decks, thereâÂÂs no need to set recording levels; the deck sets the level automatically. When recording, the volume has no effect on the recording. This means that you can record something with the volume turned right down if you want. 1 Press TAPE then load a cassette into the tape deck. In order to follow these instructions more easily, load the cassette 2 with side A facing up, then use the front panel controls. 2 Check the recording direction. If you start recording in the î direction, both sides of the tape can be recorded (unless the erase protect tab for side B is missing). If you switch sides and start recording in the î direction, then recording will start from side B and stop when the end of the tape is reached. If you need to change the direction, press î ( îÂÂî ) twice, then î (stop). 3 Set the reverse mode (page 34). ⢠î (record one side only) ⢠î or î (record both sides if recording starts in the î (forward) direction, or one side if recording starts in the î (reverse) direction) 4 Select the source you want to record. For example, press TUNER ( FM/AM on the remote) to record from the radio. If youâÂÂve selected a CD, make sure that itâÂÂs stopped. You canâÂÂt record while TAPE is selected. 5 Prepare the source for recording. For example, tune in the radio station. 6 Press REC/STOP (front panel only). The REC indicator lights in the display and the deck starts recording. 7 Start the source playing (if necessary). 8 When youâÂÂre ready to stop recording, press REC/STOP again. Automatically recording CDs (ASES) Auto Synchro Editing System (ASES for short) makes recording CDs 3 (including those with WMA/MP3 audio files) automatic. It also makes sure that a CD track isnâÂÂt spread over two sides of a tape. If the tape runs out midway through a CD track, the same track is automatically recorded from the beginning again on the other side. 4 1 Prepare the tape deck for recording. Recording starts in the î (forward) direction, so take care which way you load the tape. 2 Load the CD you want to record. 3 Press DVD/CD , then press î (stop). The CD should now be selected, but not playing. Note 1⢠Once recording has started, you canâÂÂt switch to another component until recording has stopped. So, for example, you canâÂÂt switch over to the tuner while youâÂÂre recording a CD. ⢠EV700/1000 model only â During recording, all multichannel sources are downmixed to two channels. 2⢠Before recording, check that the cassette erase-protect tabs have not been broken, and that the tape is Type I (normal posi- tion). You canâÂÂt record on Type II (high/CrO2) or IV (metal) tapes using this deck. ⢠If youâÂÂre recording from the start of a tape, itâÂÂs a good idea to wind the tape on a little so that you donâÂÂt accidently start re- cording over the leader tape. You can either do this by hand, or load the tape into the deck and play the tape for 5âÂÂ6 seconds. 3 You canâÂÂt make ASES tape recordings of Video CD/Super VCDs or DVD-Video discs. 4 ASES may not work correctly if the first side of the tape finishes at the same time as a track ends. If this happens, stop the recording then resume on the other side without ASES. EV-500-1000.book 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the tape deck 08 36 En If you want to record the tracks in a different order, or record only one track, use the program play featureâÂÂsee page 31 for how to make a program list. Make sure playback is stopped, then press PROGRAM ( SHIFT 1 ) before going to the next step. 4 Press ASES to start recording. The ASES REC indicator lights, followed by a 4 second pause while the tape winds past the leader, then recording starts. Recording finishes automatically when the end of the disc is reached, or the tape ends (whichever comes first). 5 If you want to stop recording before the end of the CD, press î (stop). Tip ⢠If you find that youâÂÂre getting noisy recordings from an AM radio station, see Optional system settings on page 48 to change the beat cut mode. ⢠If you find that the auxiliary source signal is too high (resulting in unpleasant distortion in your recording), you may need to reduce the signal level of the line source by switching on the attenuator (see Optional system settings on page 48 to do this). EV-500-1000.book 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
More tuner features 09 37 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Chapter 9 More tuner features Memorizing stations You can save up to 30 station presets so that you always have easy access to your favorite stations without having to tune in manually each time. 1 Manually saving station presets 1 Tune to an AM or FM radio station. For the FM band, select mono or auto-stereo reception as necessary. This setting is saved along with the preset. 2 Use ST /â or the number buttons to select a station preset then press ENTER . Automatically saving station presets 1 Press SYSTEM SETUP ( SHIFT HOME MENU ), use îÂÂ/î to choose âÂÂA. PRESETâ then press ENTER . Auto tuning starts in the FM band, stopping when a strong signal is received. 2 When auto tuning stops at a station, press ENTER to save the station as a preset, or press îÂÂ/î to continue without saving. Auto tuning resumes. After the FM band is finished, auto tuning continues in the AM band. Press î (stop) anytime to exit. Auto tuning stops automatically after the AM band is finished, or after the limit of 30 presets has been reached. When this happens, the tuner automatically switches to preset ST-1 . Listening to station presets 1 Press FM/AM repeatedly to select the station preset mode. The display shows ST . 2 Use the ST /â buttons to select a station preset. ⢠You can also use the number buttons and ENTER to do this. Note 1 If the system is unplugged, saved stations will remain for several days, after which youâÂÂll have to save them again. EV-500-1000.book 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Singing karaoke 10 38 En Chapter 10 Singing karaoke Singing karaoke Using the karaoke features you can plug in a microphone and mix the sound of your own voice with a backing track. 1 The backing track can be anything you like, from a song on the radio, to a dedicated DVD karaoke disc. Adjust the microphone level relative to the backing track. 1 Set the MIC VOL knob (front panel) to minimum. 2 Plug in the microphone(s). If youâÂÂre only using one mic, plug it into the MIC (MAIN) jack. The MIC (SUB) jack can be used only if MIC (MAIN) is also connected. ⢠If the microphone has an on/off switch, make sure itâÂÂs on. 3 Load a karaoke backing disc or tape. You can also use the radio or a component connected to the auxiliary inputs as source material for a backing track. 4 To change the mix (CD or Video CD/Super VCD only), press KARAOKE . Press to switch between these options: 2 ⢠KARAOKE (Vocal cancel) â Backing track vocals are partially eliminated using EQ. ⢠L CH â Left channel only. Use for tracks that have a vocal recorded in the right channel. ⢠R CH â Right channel only. Use for tracks that have a vocal recorded in the left channel. ⢠L R CH â Use to put a single-channel vocal track into the center of the mix. ⢠OFF â Switches the Karaoke mode off. 5 Play the backing track. 6 Adjust the MIC VOL knob. To avoid unpleasant feedback, make sure you donâÂÂt point the microphone(s) at the speakers. 3 7 Sing! Changing the vocal mix Adding some effects to the microphone mix can sometimes improve the overall sound. You can choose between three echo levels. ⢠To add effects to the microphone mix, press ECHO. Pressing repeatedly switches between echo levels 1 to 3 and off. Changing the backing track You may want to lower or raise the pitch of the backing track to match your vocal range. ⢠Press KEY CONTROL î ( SHIFT KARAOKE ) or î ( SHIFT ECHO ) to lower or raise the pitch of the backing track. Note 1 EV700/1000 model only â These features are only possible when a microphone is connected. Also note that during DVD play- back, using the karaoke features (including connecting a mic) automatically switches to STEREO playback and downmixes mul- tichannel sources to two channels. 2 The current setting is first shown in the display. SUB MAIN MIC VOL MIC MIN MA X 3 Depending on the microphone level, the sound of the disc may distort. If this happens, turn down the volume. EV-500-1000.book 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Adjusting the sound 11 39 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Chapter 11 Adjusting the sound Using the Sound menu EV500 only 1 There are several optional sound settings you can make from the sound menu. 1 Press SOUND MODE . 2 Use îÂÂ/î to choose the setting you want to adjust. The current setting is shown for each option (in the order shown in step 3) as you cycle through the display. 3 Use îÂÂ/î to adjust. Make adjustments to the following settings: 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for other settings. 5 When youâÂÂre done, press ENTER to leave the Sound menu. Tip ⢠You can store your current bass, treble and stereo-wide settings as a preset. Simply hold ENTER for three seconds, use îÂÂ/î to select USER 1 or USER 2 then press ENTER again to confirm. You can now select this preset from the SFC menu (see Using the Sound Field Control below). Using the Sound Field Control EV500 only Depending on the source youâÂÂre listening to, you may want to use the Sound Field Control to match the source youâÂÂre listening to. 2 ⢠Press SFC repeatedly to select a mode. The options are as follows: ⢠ACTION â Good for sound effects. ⢠DOME â Gives a âÂÂliveâ feel to the sound. ⢠DRAMA â Good for enhancing dialogue. ⢠KARAOKE â Reduces the level of vocal tracks on pre-recorded music. ⢠USER 1 / 2 â See Tip above. ⢠SFC OFF â ( SFC indicator disappears) Boosting the bass level If you want to bring up the low end for certain kinds of music or sound sources, you can use the bass boost to do so. ⢠Press X.BOOM repeatedly to select a mode. The options are as follows: ⢠X.BOOM M â Good for music with lots of bass. ⢠X.BOOM MV â Boosts low frequency (bass) sounds in movies. ⢠OFF â Switches the bass boost off. Muting the sound ⢠Press MUTE to switch off the volume. To switch the sound back on, adjust the volume or press MUTE again. Note 1 For the EV700/1000 model, see Using the Sound menu on page 27. Setting What it does Option(s) Bass Adjusts the amount of bass. âÂÂ4 to 4 Treble Adjusts the amount of treble. âÂÂ4 to 4 Balance Adjusts the left and right channel balance. CENTER to LEFT 10 / RIGHT 10 Stereo Wide Makes the stereo spread appear wider than it really is OFF ON 2 If you have adjusted sound parameters for separate SFC modes (from the sound menu), these are applied as well. EV-500-1000.book 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the timer 12 40 En Chapter 12 Using the timer Important ⢠The clock must be set for the timers to work properly (see Setting the clock on page 19). Setting the wake-up timer Use the wake-up timer to set the system to switch on at any time and start playing whatever source you want. 1 1 Select the source you want played. For example, press FM/AM to select the radio as your source. 2 Prepare the source and set the volume. For example, tune in the radio station you want to wake up to. Adjust the volume as necessary. 3 Press TIMER ( SHIFT 6) twice, use îÂÂ/î to select WAKE-UP then press ENTER . 4 Use îÂÂ/î to select EDIT then press ENTER . 5 Set the switch-on time. Use îÂÂ/î to set the hour, then press ENTER . Set the minute in the same way, pressing ENTER when youâÂÂre done. 6 Set the switch-off time. Set as above, pressing ENTER when done. The WAKE-UP indicator lights, and the switch-on, switch-off times, the function ( DVD/CD , etc.) and volume are confirmed in the display. 7 Switch the system into standby mode. The wake-up timer will not work if the system is left on! ⢠You can check the timer settings in standby by pressing TIMER ( SHIFT 6 ) twice. Turning the wake-up timer on/off If you have already set the wake-up timer, you can switch it on/off by selecting TIME ON or TIME OFF in step 4 above (press ENTER ). Setting the sleep timer The sleep timer switches off the system after a specified time so you can fall asleep without worrying about it. 2 1 Press TIMER ( SHIFT 6) twice, use îÂÂ/î to select SLEEP then press ENTER . 2 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) to select a switch-off time then press ENTER . Choose between the following options: ⢠AUTO â Switches off automatically after the currently playing CD or Video CD has finished. 3 ⢠SLEEP 90 â Switches off after 90 minutes ⢠SLEEP 60 â Switches off after an hour ⢠SLEEP 30 â Switches off after 30 minutes ⢠OFF â Cancels the sleep timer 3 To check how much time is left, repeat step 1. The remaining time is displayed momentarily. Note 1 You cannot have the wake-up timer and the record timer set at the same time. 2⢠If you set the sleep timer while either the wake-up or recording timer is active, the earlier switch off time takes priority. ⢠The system will switch into standby if you change the input function during AUTO sleep mode. 3 AUTO will not work with DVD/CDs in repeat play, cassette tapes, or Video CD/Super VCDs during PBC playback. EV-500-1000.book 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the timer 12 41 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Setting the record timer You can set the timer to record from the LINE source, or something off the radio. For example, you might want to record a program that is broadcast while you're at work. 1 1 Set up the tape deck. Load a cassette tape, wind on past the leader tape and set the reverse mode (see Making tape recordings on page 35 for more on this). 2 Select the source you want to record. Press FM/AM ( TUNER on the front panel) or LINE and prepare the source. 2 3 Press TIMER ( SHIFT 6) twice, use îÂÂ/î to select REC then press ENTER . 4 Use îÂÂ/î to select EDIT then press ENTER . 5 Set the switch-on time. Use îÂÂ/î to set the hour, then press ENTER . Set the minute in the same way, pressing ENTER when youâÂÂre done. 6 Set the switch-off time. Set as above, pressing ENTER when done. The REC indicator lights, then the switch-on, switch-off times and the function (or frequency, if you selected the tuner) are confirmed in the display. 7 Switch the system into standby mode. The record timer will not work if the system is left on! Turning the record timer on/off If you have already set the record timer, you can switch it on/off by selecting REC ON or REC OFF in step 4 above (press ENTER ). Note 1⢠During the actual recording, the volume is automatically set to minimum. After the recording has finished, the record timer is canceled. ⢠You cannot have the record timer and the wake-up timer set at the same time. 2 For example, if you select the tuner, tune in the station you want to record (see Listening to the radio on page 21). EV-500-1000.book 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Audio Settings and Video Adjust menu 13 42 En Chapter 13 Audio Settings and Video Adjust menu Audio Settings menu EV500 only 1 The Audio Settings menu offers features for adjusting the way discs sound. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂAudio Settingsâ from the on-screen display. 2 Select and change settings using the îÂÂ/ îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor) buttons, and ENTER . Audio DRC ⢠Settings: Low , Medium , High , Off (default) When watching Dolby Digital DVDs at low volume, itâÂÂs easy to lose the quieter sounds completelyâÂÂincluding some of the dialog. Switching Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) to on can help by bringing up the quieter sounds, while controlling loud peaks. How much of a difference you hear depends on the material youâÂÂre listening to. If the material doesnâÂÂt have wide variations in volume, you may not notice much change. 2 Virtual Surround ⢠Settings: On , Off (default) Switch on Virtual Surround to enjoy realistic surround sound effects from just two speakers. 3 Video Adjust menu From the Video Adjust screen you can adjust various settings that affect how the picture is presented. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo Adjustâ from the on-screen display. 2 Make settings using the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor) buttons and ENTER . You can adjust the following picture quality settings: ⢠Sharpness â Adjusts the sharpness of edges in the picture ( Fine , Standard , Soft ) ⢠Brightness â Adjusts the overall brightness ( âÂÂ20 to 20 ). ⢠Contrast â Adjusts the contrast between light and dark ( âÂÂ16 to 16 ). ⢠Gamma â Adjusts the âÂÂwarmthâ of the picture ( High , Medium , Low , Off ). ⢠Hue â Adjusts the red/green balance ( Green 9 to Red 9 ). Note 1 For the EV700/1000 model, see Dynamic Range Control in System Setup menu options on page 24 (this method of adjustment is also available for the EV500 model, but an extra setting of LOW also appears). 2⢠Audio DRC is only effective with Dolby Digital audio sources. ⢠The effect of Audio DRC also depends on your speakers and settings. Audio Settings 3⢠96kHz Linear PCM audio is automatically downsampled to 48kHz if Virtual Surround is switched on. ⢠How good the surround effect is varies with the disc. V ideo Adjust EV-500-1000.book 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Audio Settings and Video Adjust menu 13 43 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts how saturated colors appear ( âÂÂ9 to 9 ). Adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Hue and Chroma Level settings using the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons. 3 Press ENTER to return to the Video Adjust screen, or HOME MENU to exit. Brightness min max 0 EV-500-1000.book 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 14 44 En Chapter 14 Initial Settings menu Using the Initial Settings menu The Initial Settings menu provides audio and video output settings, parental lock settings, and display settings, among others. If an option is grayed out it means that it cannot be changed at the current time. This is usually because a disc is playing. Stop the disc, then change the setting. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Use the cursor buttons and ENTER to select the setting and option you want to set. All the settings and options are explained on the following pages. Important ⢠In the table below, the default setting is shown in bold : other settings are shown in italics . ⢠Some settings, such as TV Screen , Audio Language and Subtitle Language may be overridden by the DVD disc. Often these settings can also be made from the DVD disc menu. ⢠The Component Out setting only needs to be set if you have connected this player to your TV using component video. Video Output settings Initial Settings Setting Option What it means TV Screen (See also Screen sizes and disc formats on page 58.) 4:3 (Letter Box) Set if you have a conventional 4:3 TV. Widescreen movies are shown with black bars top and bottom. 4:3 (Pan & Scan) Set if you have a conventional 4:3 TV. Widescreen movies are shown with the sides cropped so that the image fills the screen. 16:9 (Wide) Set if you have a widescreen TV. Component Out (See also Connecting using the component video output on page 12.) Interlace Set if your TV is not compatible with progressive scan video. Progressive Set if your TV is compatible with progressive scan video (see your TVâÂÂs instruction manual for details). Press ENTER once more to confirm (or RETURN to cancel). Note that progressive scan video is only output from the component video jacks. EV-500-1000.book 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 14 45 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Language settings Display settings Options settings Setting Option What it means Audio Language English If there is an English soundtrack on the disc, it is played. Languages as displayed If there is a language selected on the disc, it is played. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (see Using the language code list on page 58). Subtitle Language English If there are English subtitles on the disc they are displayed. Languages as displayed The subtitle language selected on the disc is displayed. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (see Using the language code list on page 58). DVD Menu Language w/Subtitle Lang. DVD disc menus are displayed in the same language as your selected subtitle language, if possible. Languages as displayed DVD menus are displayed in the selected language, if possible. Other Language Select to choose a language other than the ones displayed (see Using the language code list on page 58). Subtitle Display On Subtitles are displayed in your selected subtitle language. Off Subtitles are always off by default when you play a DVD disc. Setting Option What it means OSD Language English On-screen displays of the player are in English. Languages as displayed On-screen displays are shown in the language selected. Angle Indicator On A camera icon is displayed on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a DVD disc. Off No multi-angle indication is shown. Setting Option What it means Parental Lock â See Parental Lock below. DivX VOD Display See About DivXî VOD content below. EV-500-1000.book 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 14 46 En Parental Lock ⢠Default level: Off ; Default password: none ; Default Country/Area code: us (2119) To give you some control over what your children watch on your DVD player, some DVD- Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. If your player is set to a lower level than the disc, the disc wonâÂÂt play. Some discs also support the Country/Area Code feature. The player does not play certain scenes on these discs, depending on the Country/Area Code you set. Registering a new password Register a password to change the Parental Lock level or enter a Country/Area code. 1 1 Select âÂÂPasswordâÂÂ. 2 Use the number buttons to input a 4-digit password then press ENTER . Changing your password To change your password, confirm your existing password then enter a new one. 1 Select âÂÂPassword ChangeâÂÂ. 2 Input your existing password, then press ENTER . 3 Enter a new password and press ENTER . Setting/changing the Parental Lock 1 Select âÂÂLevel ChangeâÂÂ. 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER . 3 Select a new level and press ENTER . ⢠Press î (cursor left) repeatedly to lock more levels (more discs will require the password); press î (cursor right) to unlock levels. You canâÂÂt lock level 1. Setting/changing the Country/Area code You can find the Country/Area code list on page 59. 1 Select âÂÂCountry CodeâÂÂ. 2 Input your password, then press ENTER . 3 Select a Country/Area code then press ENTER . There are two ways you can do this: ⢠Select by code letter: Use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/ down) to change the Country/Area code. ⢠Select by code number: Press î (cursor right) then use the number buttons to enter the 4-digit Country/Area code. The new Country/Area code takes effect after ejecting the disc once. Note 1⢠Not all discs use Parental Lock, and will play without requiring the password first. ⢠If you forget your password, youâÂÂll need to reset the player to register a new password. (see Resetting the system on page 53). Vi deo Output Language Display Options Parental Lock Photoviewer Password Level Change Country Code Initial Settings EV-500-1000.book 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 14 47 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español About DivX î VOD content In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this player, you first need to register the player with your DivX VOD content provider. You do this by generating a DivX VOD registration code, which you submit to your provider. 1 Important ⢠DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Digital Rights Management) system. This restricts playback of content to specific, registered devices. ⢠If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD content not authorized for your player, the message Authorization Error is displayed and the content will not play. Displaying your DivX VOD registration code 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SettingsâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂOptionsâÂÂ, then âÂÂDivX VODâÂÂ. 3 Select âÂÂDisplayâÂÂ. Your 8-digit registration code is displayed. Make a note of the code as you will need it when you register with a DivX VOD provider. Playing DivX î VOD content Some DivX VOD content may only be playable a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD content, the remaining number of plays is shown on-screen and you then have the option of playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has zero remaining plays), the message Rental Expired is displayed. If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited number of plays, then you may load the disc into your player and play the content as often as you like, and no message will be displayed. Note 1 Resetting the player (as described in Resetting the system on page 53) will not cause you to lose your registration code. Video Output Language Display Options Display Initial Settings Parental Lock DivX VOD Video Output Language Display Options Initial Settings DivX VOD Registration Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EV-500-1000.book 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 48 En Chapter 15 Additional information Optional system settings These settings are accessed by using the System Setup menu while in standby. 1 Switch the system into standby. 2 Press SYSTEM SETUP ( SHIFT HOME MENU ). 3 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) to choose the setting then press ENTER . The current setting is shown for each option as you cycle through the display. See below for a full list and description of each. 4 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) to adjust the setting then press ENTER to confirm. 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to make other settings. System Setup menu options in standby Below are all the available settings in the setup menu. The first setting in each is the default. System demo setting Switches the automatic demo feature on or off 1 (this starts when you plug in for the first time): ⢠DEMO ON â Switches the demo feature on. ⢠DEMO OFF â Switches the demo feature off. Key lock setting The Key Lock feature is useful when youâÂÂve set the wake-up timer and donâÂÂt want the system switched on before it activates. ⢠LOCK ON â Makes the front panel buttons and controls inoperative. ⢠LOCK OFF â Restores regular use of the front panel buttons and controls. Clock format setting Specifies how the clock is displayed: ⢠12-HOUR â Display shows 12-hour format. ⢠24-HOUR â Display shows 24-hour format. Line attenuator setting If the source connected to the analog LINE input is distorting, the attenuator will reduce the signal level. ⢠ATT 6DB â Reduces signal level by 6dB. ⢠ATT 10DB (EV700/1000 only) â Reduces signal level by 10dB. ⢠ATT OFF â No attenuation Tape deck beat cut setting Recording AM broadcasts on cassette tape can result in noisy recordings. If you experience this, change the beat cut mode. ⢠B.CUT 1 ⢠B.CUT 2 Frequency step setting If you find that you canâÂÂt tune into stations successfully, the frequency step may not be suitable for your country/region. ⢠AM 9K â AM 9kHz / FM50Hz ⢠AM 10K â AM10kHz / FM100Hz Note 1 After setting the clock, the demo mode switches off automatically. However, if you unplug the system from the wall outlet, the demo mode will revert to DEMO ON (and the clock will be reset). EV-500-1000.book 48 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 49 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español TV system setting The default setting of this system is AUTO , and unless you notice that the picture is distorted when playing some discs, you should leave it set to AUTO . If you find picture distortion with some discs, set the TV system to match your country or regionâÂÂs system. However, this may restrict the kinds of disc you can watch. See the table for the kinds of discs compatible with each setting ( AUTO , PAL and NTSC ). 1 ⢠After selecting TV SYS in step 3 above, press ENTER to change the TV system. The TV system as follows: ⢠AUTO î NTSC ⢠NTSC î PAL ⢠PAL î AUTO The system automatically switches on and youâÂÂll see the new TV system setting in the display after seeing Welcome . 2 Using and taking care of discs DVD Video regions All DVD Video discs carry a region mark that indicates which region(s) of the world the disc is compatible with. Your DVD system also has a region mark (on the rear panel). Discs from incompatible regions will not play in this player. Discs marked ALL play in any player. Disc / content format playback compatibility This player is compatible with a wide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally feature one of the following logos on the disc and/or disc packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as recordable CD and DVD, may be in an unplayable format. See the Disc compatibility table below for more information. ⢠is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd. ⢠is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation ⢠Also compatible with KODAK Picture CD This player supports the IECâÂÂs Super VCD stan- dard for superior picture quality, dual soundtracks, and widescreen support. Note 1 Most models of the newly developed countdown PAL TV system detect 50 Hz (PAL)/60 Hz (NTSC) and automatically switch vertical amplitude, resulting in a display without vertical shrinkage. However, in some cases, the image may appear without col - or. If your PAL TV does not have a V-Hold control, you may not be able to watch NTSC discs because of picture roll. If the TV h as a V-Hold control, adjust it until the picture stops rolling. On some TVs, the picture may shrink vertically, leaving black bands at the top and bottom of the screen. Disc Player setting Type Format NTSC PAL AUTO DVD/Super VCD/ Video CD/DivX Video NTSC NTSC PAL NTSC PAL NTSC PAL PAL CD/MP3/WMA/ JPEG/no disc â NTSC PAL NTSC or PAL 2 You have to switch the player into standby (press î STANDBY/ON ) before each change. DVD- Video DVD-R DVD-RW Vid e o CD Fu jicolor CD Audio CD CD-R CD-RW VIDEO CD Super Video CD (Super VCD) EV-500-1000.book 49 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 50 En Disc compatibility table About DivX DivX is a compressed digital video format created by the DivX î video codec from DivXNetworks, Inc. This player can play DivX video files burned on CD-R/RW/ROM discs. Keeping the same terminology as DVD-Video, individual DivX video files are called "Titles." When naming files/titles on a CD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabetical order. DivX video compatibility ⢠Official DivX î Certified product. ⢠Plays DivX î 5, DivX î 4, DivX î 3, and DivX î VOD video content (in compliance with DivX î Certified technical requirements). ⢠File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must be used for the player to recognize DivX video files). Note that all files with the .avi extension are recognized as MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX video files and therefore may not be playable on this player. Displaying DivX subtitle files The font sets listed below are available for DivX external subtitle files. You can see the proper font set on-screen by setting the Subtitle Language (in Language settings on page 45) to match the subtitle file. 1 This player displays subtitles for the following language groups: Media Compatible formats CD-R/RW ⢠CD-Audio, Video CD/Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* * ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible. ⢠Multi-session playback: No ⢠Unï¬Ânalized disc playback: No DVD-R/RW ⢠DVD- Video , Video Recording (VR)* * Edit points may not play exactly as edited; screen may go momentarily blank at edited points. ⢠Unï¬Ânalized playback: No ⢠WMA/MP3/JPEG ï¬Âle playback on DVD-R/RW : No PC-cre- ated disc ⢠Discs recorded using a PC may not be playable due to the setting of the software used to create the disc. In these instances, check the DVD-R/RW or CD -R/RW sof tware manual or disc boxes for more on compatibility . ⢠Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are not compatible. Com- pressed audio ⢠MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio (WMA) ⢠Sampling rates: 32, 44.1 or 48kHz ⢠Bit-rates: Any (128Kbps or higher recommended) ⢠VBR (variable bit rate) MP3 playback: No ⢠VBR WMA playback: No ⢠WMA lossless encoding: No ⢠DRM (Digital Rights Management) compatible: Y es (DRM-protected audio ï¬Âles will not play in this player). ⢠File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for the player to recognize MP3 and WMA ﬠles ⢠File structure (may differ): Up to 299 folders on a disc; up to 648 folders and ï¬Âles (combined) within each folder JPEG ï¬Âle ⢠Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2* still image ï¬Âles up to a resolution of 3072 x 2048. * File format for digital still cameras ⢠File extensions: .jpg (must be used for the player to recognize JPEG ﬠles) ⢠File structure (may differ): Up to 299 folders on a disc; up to 648 folders and ï¬Âles (combined) within each folder Media Compatible formats EV-500-1000.book 50 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 51 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Group 1: Albanian (sq), Basque (eu), Catalan (ca), Danish (da), Dutch (nl), English (en), Faroese (fo), Finnish (fi), French (fr), German (de), Icelandic (is), Irish (ga), Italian (it), Norwegian (no), Portuguese (pt), Rhaeto- Romanic (rm), Scottish (gd), Spanish (es), Swedish (sv) Group 2: Albanian (sq), Croatian (hr), Czech (cs), Hungarian (hu), Polish (pl), Romanian (ro), Slovak (sk), Slovenian (sl) Group 3: Bulgarian (bg), Byelorussian (be), Macedonian (mk), Russian (ru), Serbian (sr), Ukrainian (uk) Group 4: Hebrew (iw), Yiddish (ji) Group 5: Turkish (tr) DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivXNetworks, Inc. and are used under license. About WMA The Windows Media î logo printed on the box indicates that this player can playback Windows Media Audio content. WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by using Windows Media î Player version 7, 7.1, Windows Media î Player for Windows î XP, or Windows Media î Player 9 Series. Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/ or other countries. Handling discs Hold the disc by its edges when handling so as not to leave fingerprints, dirt or scratches on either side of the disc. Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback performance. If a disc becomes marked with fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth. Wipe lightly from the center of the disc using straight strokes. DonâÂÂt wipe the disc surface with circular strokes. If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning agents such as those designed for cleaning vinyl records. Storing discs Avoid leaving discs in excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including under direct sunlight). Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing instrument. These could all damage the disc. Discs to avoid Discs spin at high speed inside the player. If a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged, don't risk using it in your playerâ you could end up damaging the unit. This unit is designed for use with conventional, fully circular discs only. Pioneer disclaims all liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs. Note 1⢠For external subtitle files the following subtitle format filename extensions are supported (please note that these files are not shown within the disc navigation menu): .srt, .sub, .ssa, .smi ⢠Some external subtitle files may be displayed incorrectly or not at all. ⢠The filename of the movie file has to be repeated at the beginning of the filename for the external subtitle file. ⢠The number of external subtitle files which can be switched for the same movie file is limited to a maximum of 10. EV-500-1000.book 51 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 52 En Using cassette tapes The tape of a cassette is quite easily damaged and loose tape can jam in the tape deck mechanism. If the tape has become unwound, use a pen or pencil to wind it back on to the spool. When not using cassettes, always store in the case. Store cassettes away from magnetic fields, excessive heat, humidity, dust or oil. Before recording on a tape, wind the tape on past the leader tape (about the first 3 or 4 seconds of each side). Tapes you should avoid Since tapes longer than 90 minutes are so thin, they are more susceptible to jamming in the tape deck mechanism and other trouble such as irregular winding. Avoid using cassette tapes longer than 90 minutes. Protecting your recordings You can protect an important recording against accidental erasure by breaking the erase-protect tab(s) with a small screwdriver. If you want to re-record on an erase-protected cassette, cover the space left by the broken tab with self-adhesive tape. Installation and maintenance Hints on installation We want you to enjoy using this system for years to come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a location: Do... î Use in a well-ventilated room. î Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack . DonâÂÂt... î Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat-generating appliances. î Place on a window sill or other place where the system will be exposed to direct sunlight. î Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment. î Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. î Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interferenceâÂÂespecially if the television uses an indoor antenna. î Use in a kitchen or other room where the system may be exposed to smoke or steam. î Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with clothâÂÂthis may prevent proper cooling of the system unit. î Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the system unitâÂÂs feet. Erase-protect tab (For side A) Erase-protect tab (For side B) EV-500-1000.book 52 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 53 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Cleaning the pickup lens The DVD playerâÂÂs lens should not become dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer authorized service center. Although lens cleaners are commercially available, we do not recommend using them since some may damage the lens. Problems with condensation Condensation may form inside the player if it is brought into a warm room from outside, or if the temperature of the room rises quickly. Although this wonâÂÂt damage the player, it may temporarily impair performance. You should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about an hour before switching on. Moving the system unit If you need to move the main unit, first remove a disc if thereâÂÂs one in the player, then press î STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn the system off. Wait for GOOD BYE to disappear from the display, then unplug the power cord. 1 Never lift or move the unit during playbackâ discs rotate at high speeds and may damage. Resetting the system Use this procedure to reset all system settings to the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this. 1 Switch the system into standby. 2 Press and hold the î (stop) button for about 7 seconds until the display shows âÂÂMEM.CLR?â Use î or î to select it if it does not show in the display. 3 Press the î button. All the systemâÂÂs settings are now reset, and you should see Welcome in the front panel display. Note 1 Unplugging the unit before GOOD BYE disappears from the display may cause the system to return to the factory settings. EV-500-1000.book 53 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 54 En Troubleshooting Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. ⢠If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions. General Problem Remedy The power does not turn on. ⢠Connect the power plug to the wall outlet. ⢠Disconnect the power plug from the outlet, and insert again. ⢠Make sure the power source is the right voltage for the AC inlet. The power suddenly switches off automatically and wonâÂÂt switch back on for a minute or so. Also , the timer indicator is blinking. ⢠If the speaker cables arenâÂÂt connected properly , the system has a safety feature that shuts the power off automatically . Check the speaker wires to make sure theyâÂÂre connected properly . If there appears to be nothing wrong, tr y switching the power back on af ter the timer indicator has been blinking for a minute or so. ⢠If you canâÂÂt seem to switch the power back on after the timer indicator has been blinking for over a minute, the unit may be malfunctioning. T ake it to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carr y out repair work. No sound is output when a function is selected. ⢠If youâÂÂre using the LINE input, make sure the component is connected correctly (see Connecting auxiliary components on page 12). ⢠P ress MUTE on the remote control to turn muting off . ⢠Adjust the volume. No image is output when watching discs. ⢠Make sure the TV is connected correctly (see Connecting to your TV on page 11). System does not output digital audio at 96kHz. ⢠As a copy-protection measure, some DVDs do not output 96kHz audio. In this case, even if 96 kHz is selected, the player automatically outputs the audio at 48 kHz. This is not a malfunction. CanâÂÂt operate the remote control. ⢠Replace the batteries (see Loading the batteries on page 6). ⢠Operate within 23 feet (7 m), 30ð of the remote sensor on the front panel (see Range of the remote control unit on page 6). ⢠Remove the obstacle or operate from another position . ⢠Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the front panel to direct light. EV-500-1000.book 54 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 55 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español DVD/CD/Video CD player The microphone canâÂÂt be heard. ⢠Stop the disc, then restart playback. ⢠Y ou are only using one microphone and itâÂÂs plugged into the MIC (SUB) jack. The MIC (SUB) jack can only be used if there is also a microphone plugged into the MIC (MAIN) jack. ⢠Adjust the MIC VOL . F eedback noise when mic is switched on. ⢠The mic is pointing toward the speakers. Keep the mic pointed away from the speakers. ⢠The microphone level is set too high. T urn down the mic control level. SND. DEMO shows in the display and the unit canâÂÂt be controlled. ⢠P ress and hold î (stop) on the front panel for about ï¬Âve seconds. The disc tray ejects automatically to indicate the Sound Demo mode is disabled. TRAYLOCK shows in the display and the tray canâÂÂt be ejected. ⢠P ress and hold î (eject) on the front panel for about eight seconds. Then the tray can be opened/closed using î (eject). Problem Remedy Problem Remedy The disc is ejected automatically after loading. ⢠Clean the disc. ⢠Align the disc properly in the disc guide. ⢠If the region number on a DVD-video disc does not match the number on the player , the disc cannot be used (see DVD Video regions on page 49). ⢠Allow time for any condensation inside the player to evaporate. Avoid using the player near an air-conditioning unit. Playback is not possible. ⢠Disc may be loaded upside down. R eload the disc with the label side face up. P icture playback stops and the operation buttons cannot be used. ⢠P ress î , then start playback again ( î ). ⢠Switch the power off once, then on again using the front panel î STANDBY/ON button. Settings are canceled. ⢠When the power is cut due to power failure or by unplugging the power cord for several days, settings will be canceled. No picture/No color . ⢠Check that connections are correct and that plugs are inserted fully . ⢠Check the instruction manual of the TV/monitor to make sure the TV/monitor settings are incorrect. Screen is stretched or aspect does not change. ⢠The TV Screen setting is incorrect. Set the TV Screen option to match the TV/monitor you're using (see Video Output settings on page 44). When recorded on a VCR or passed through an A V selector , there is disturbance in the playback picture. ⢠Due to the player âÂÂs copy protection circuits, connection of this device through a VCR or an A V selector may prevent recording or cause picture problems. This is not a malfunction. EV-500-1000.book 55 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 56 En WMA/MP3/JPEG discs Tuner P icture disturbance during playback or dark. ⢠This player is compatible with Macro- Vision System copy guard. Some discs include a copy prevention signal, and when this type of disc is played back, stripes etc., may appear on some sections of the picture depending on the TV . This is not a malfunction. ⢠Discs respond differently to particular player functions. This may result in the screen becoming black for a brief instant or shaking slightly when the function is executed. These problems are largely due to differences between discs and disc content and are not malfunctions of this player . Noticeable difference in DVD and CD volume. ⢠DVDs and CDs use different recording methods. This is not a malfunction. Problem Remedy Problem Remedy CD-ROM disc is not recognized by the system. ⢠Make sure that the CD-ROM was recorded using the ISO 9660 disc format. See Disc / content format playback compatibility on page 49 for other disc compatibility information. Files don âÂÂt show up in the Disc Navigator/ Photo Browser . ⢠The ï¬Âles on the disc must be named with the correct ï¬Âle extension: .mp3 for MP3 ï¬Âles; .wma for WMA ï¬Âles; .jpg for JPEG ï¬Âles (upper or lower-case is OK). See Disc / content format playback compatibility on page 49 for other disc compatibility information. Problem Remedy Considerable noise in radio broadcasts. ⢠Connect the antenna (see Connecting the radio antennas on page 10). ⢠F ully extend the FM wire antenna, position for best reception, and secure to a wall. ⢠Connect an outdoor FM antenna (see Connecting external antennas on page 11). ⢠Adjust the direction and position for best reception. ⢠Connect an additional internal or external AM antenna (see Connecting the radio antennas on page 10). ⢠T urn off any other equipment that may be causing the noise or move it away from the unit. ⢠Place the antenna farther away from any other equipment that may be causing the noise. ⢠The tuning inter val is incorrect for your countr y or region. T ry switching the tuning inter val (see Frequency step setting on page 48). Auto tuning does not pick up some stations. ⢠The radio signal is weak. Auto tuning will only detect radio stations with a good signal. F or more sensitive tuning, connect an outdoor antenna. EV-500-1000.book 56 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 57 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Tape deck Error Messages Sound is mono only . ⢠Check that the tuner is not set to FM mono (see Improving FM stereo sound on page 22). Problem Remedy Problem Remedy Cannot record. ⢠Check that the cassette still has its erase-protect tabs intact, or that they are covered with self-adhesive tape ( Using cassette tapes on page 52). Sound is mufï¬Âed or previous recording is still audible underneath the new one. ⢠The tape heads may be dirty . Clean the tape heads using a head- cleaning cassette or cleaning kit. ⢠Check that youâÂÂre using a T ype I (normal) tape. Do not use T ype II (high/CrO2) or T ype IV (metal) tapes. Music search does not work ⢠The spaces between songs may be too short for music search to work. ⢠Make sure that the tape is playing when using music searchâÂÂit will not work if the tape is stopped. Recording made from the LINE input are distorted or ver y quiet. ⢠Set the line attenuator on or off as necessar y (see System Setup menu options in standby on page 48). Message Description KEY LOCK ⢠This message appears when the front panel buttons are pressed when the child lock feature is active. See Optional system settings on page 48 for more on switching on/off the child lock. RMODE ON ⢠An operation is prohibited because the line recording mode is on (see Using the Sound menu on page 27), or when recording to the tape deck. PHONES IN ⢠An operation is prohibited because headphones are connected. 96K ⢠An operation is prohibited because the source is digital 96kHz PCM. MUTING ⢠An operation is prohibited because the sound is muted. EXIT ⢠Appears brieï¬Ây when a menu is automatically exited after a set period of inactivity . NO MIC ⢠A karaoke feature is prohibited because no mic is connected. MIC IN ⢠An operation is prohibited because the mic is connected. EV-500-1000.book 57 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 58 En Screen sizes and disc formats DVD-Video discs come in different screen aspects, ranging from TV programs, which are generally 4:3, to CinemaScope widescreen movies 1 , with an aspect ratio of up to about 7:3. Televisions also come in different aspect ratios; âÂÂstandardâ 4:3 and widescreen 16:9. 2 Using the language code list Some of the language options (see Language settings on page 45) allow you to set your preferred language from any of the 136 languages listed in the Language code list . 1 Select âÂÂOther LanguageâÂÂ. 2 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) to select either a code letter or a code number. 3 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) to select a code letter or a code number. See the Language code list (next page) for a complete list of languages and codes. Note 1 Many widescreen discs override the systemâÂÂs settings so that the disc is shown in letterbox format regardless of the setting. Set to 4:3 (Letter Box), widescreen discs are shown with black bars top and bottom. Set to 4:3 (Pan&Scan) , widescreen discs are shown with the left and right sides cropped. Although the picture looks larger, you donâÂÂt actually see the whole picture. 2⢠Using the 16:9 (Wide) setting with a standard 4:3 TV, or one of the 4:3 settings with a widescreen TV, will result in distortion. ⢠When you watch discs recorded in 4:3 format, you can use the TV controls to select how the picture is presented. Your TV may offer various zoom and stretch options; see the instructions that came with your TV for details. ⢠Some movie aspect ratios are wider than 16:9, so even with a widescreen TV, these discs will still play in a âÂÂletterboxâ styl e. EV-500-1000.book 58 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 59 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Language code list Language (Language code letter), Language code Country/Area code list Country/Area, Country/Area code, Country/Area code letter Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French (fr), 0618 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 0920 Spanish (es), 0519 Dutch (nl), 1412 Russian (ru), 1821 Chinese (zh), 2608 Korean (ko), 1115 Greek (el), 0512 Afar (aa), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0315 Czech (cs), 0319 Welsh (cy), 0325 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroese (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croatian (hr), 0818 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Icelandic (is), 0919 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Javanese (jw), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambodian (km), 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laothian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmese (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Norwegian (no), 1415 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Polish (pl), 1612 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Romanian (ro), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sangho (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 1917 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swedish (sv), 1922 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 2012 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tonga (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volapük (vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yoruba (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Argentina, 0118, ar Australia, 0121, au Austria, 0120, at Belgium, 0205, be Brazil, 0218, br Canada, 0301, ca Chile, 0312, cl China, 0314, cn Denmark, 0411, dk Finland, 0609, fi France, 0618, fr Germany, 0405, de Hong Kong, 0811, hk India, 0914, in Indonesia, 0904, id Italy, 0920, it Japan, 1016, jp Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr Malaysia, 1325, my Mexico, 1324, mx Netherlands, 1412, nl New Zealand, 1426, nz Norway, 1415, no Pakistan, 1611, pk Philippines, 1608, ph Portugal, 1620, pt Russian Federation, 1821, ru Singapore, 1907, sg Spain, 0519, es Switzerland, 0308, ch Sweden, 1905, se Taiwan, 2023, tw Thailand, 2008, th United Kingdom, 0702, gb United States of America, 2119, us EV-500-1000.book 59 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 60 En Preset code list Please note that there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using. ACURA 644 ADMIRAL 631 AIWA 660 AKAI 632, 635, 642 AKURA 641 ALBA 607, 639, 641, 644 AMSTRAD 642, 644, 647 ANITECH 644 ASA 645 ASUKA 641 AUDIOGONIC 607, 636 BASIC LINE 641, 644 BAUR 631, 607, 642 BEKO 638 BEON 607 BLAUPUNKT 631 BLUE SKY 641 BLUE STAR 618 BPL 618 BRANDT 636 BTC 641 BUSH 607, 641, 642, 644, 647, 656 CASCADE 644 CATHAY 607 CENTURION 607 CGB 642 CIMLINE 644 CLARIVOX 607 CLATRONIC 638 CONDOR 638 CONTEC 644 CROSLEY 632 CROWN 638, 644 CRYSTAL 642 CYBERTRON 641 DAEWOO 607, 644, 656 DAINICHI 641 DANSAI 607 DAYTON 644 DECCA 607, 648 DIXI 607, 644 DUMONT 653 ELIN 607 ELITE 641 ELTA 644 EMERSON 642 ERRES 607 FERGUSON 607, 636, 651 FINLANDIA 635, 643, 655 FINLUX 632, 607, 645, 648, 653, 654, 655 FIRSTLINE 640, 644 FISHER 632, 635, 638, 645 FORMENTI 632, 607, 642 FRONTECH 631, 642, 646 FRONTECH / PROTECH 632 FUJITSU 648, 629 FUNAI 640, 646, 658 GBC 632, 642 GE 601, 608, 607, 610, 617, 602, 628, 618 GEC 607, 634, 648 GELOSO 632, 644 GENEXXA 631, 641 GOLDSTAR 610, 623, 621, 602, 607, 650 GOODMANS 607, 639, 647, 648, 656 GORENJE 638 GPM 641 GRAETZ 631, 642 GRANADA 607, 635, 642, 643, 648 GRADIENTE 630, 657 GRANDIN 618 GRUNDIG 631, 653 HANSEATIC 607, 642 HCM 618, 644 HINARI 607, 641, 644 HISAWA 618 HITACHI 631, 633, 634, 636, 642, 643, 654, 606, 610, 624, 625, 618 HUANYU 656 HYPSON 607, 618, 646 ICE 646, 647 IMPERIAL 638, 642 INDIANA 607 INGELEN 631 INTERFUNK 631, 632, 607, 642 INTERVISION 646, 649 ISUKAI 641 ITC 642 ITT 631, 632, 642 JEC 605 JVC 613, 623 KAISUI 618, 641, 644 KAPSCH 631 KENDO 642 KENNEDY 632, 642 KORPEL 607 KOYODA 644 LEYCO 607, 640, 646, 648 LIESENK &TTER 607 LOEWE 607 LUXOR 632, 642, 643 M -ELECTRONIC 631, 644, 645, 654, 655, 656, 607, 636, 651 MAGNADYNE 632, 649 MAGNAFON 649 MAGNAVOX 607, 610, 603, 612, 629 MANESTH 639, 646 MARANTZ 607 MARK 607 MATSUI 607, 639, 640, 642, 644, 647, 648 MEDIATOR 607 MEMOREX 644 METZ 631 MINERVA 631, 653 MITSUBISHI 609, 610, 602, 621, 631 MULTITECH 644, 649 NEC 659 NECKERMANN 631, 607 NEI 607, 642 NIKKAI 605, 607, 641, 646, 648 NOBLIKO 649 NOKIA 632, 642, 652 NORDMENDE 632, 636, 651, 652 OCEANIC 631, 632, 642 ORION 632, 607, 639, 640 OSAKI 641, 646, 648 OSO 641 OSUME 648 OTTO VERSAND 631, 632, 607, 642 PALLADIUM 638 PANAMA 646 PANASONIC 631, 607, 608,642, 622 PATHO CINEMA 642 PAUSA 644 PHILCO 632, 642 PHILIPS 631, 607, 634, 656 PHOENIX 632 PHONOLA 607 PROFEX 642, 644 PROTECH 607, 642, 644, 646, 649 QUELLE 631, 632, 607, 642, 645, 653 R -LINE 607 RADIOLA 607 RADIOSHACK 610, 623, 621, 602 RBM 653 RCA 601, 610, 615, 616, 617, 618, 661, 662, 609 REDIFFUSION 632, 642 REX 631, 646 ROADSTAR 641, 644, 646 SABA 631, 636, 642, 651 SAISHO 639, 644, 646 SALORA 631, 632, 642, 643 SAMBERS 649 SAMSUNG 607, 638, 644, 646 SANYO 635, 645, 648, 621, 614 SBR 607, 634 SCHAUB LORENZ 642 SCHNEIDER 607, 641, 647 SEG 642, 646 MCMICHAEL 634 SEI 632, 640, 649 SELECO 631, 642 SHARP 602, 619, 627 SIAREM 632, 649 SIEMENS 631 SINUDYNE 632, 639, 640, 649 SKANTIC 643 SOLAVOX 631 SONOKO 607, 644 SONOLOR 631, 635 SONTEC 607 SONY 604 SOUNDWAVE 607 STANDARD 641, 644 STERN 631 SUSUMU 641 SYSLINE 607 TANDY 631, 641, 648 TASHIKO 634 TATUNG 607, 648 TEC 642 TELEAVIA 636 TELEFUNKEN 636, 637, 652 TELETECH 644 TENSAI 640, 641 THOMSON 636, 651, 652, 663 THORN 631, 607, 642, 645, 648 TOMASHI 618 TOSHIBA 605, 602, 626, 621, 653 TOWADA 642 ULTRAVOX 632, 642, 649 UNIVERSUM 631, 607, 638, 642, 645, 646, 654, 655 VESTEL 607 VICTOR 613 VOXSON 631 WALTHAM 643 WATSON 607 WATT RADIO 632, 642, 649 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 607 YOKO 607, 642, 646 ZENITH 603, 620 PIONEER 600, 631, 632, 607, 636, 642, 651 EV-500-1000.book 60 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 61 En English Français Deutsch Nederlands Italiano Español Specifications ⢠Amplifier section EV700/1000 model Continuous power output: Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W per channel (1kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 6 ⦠) Center . . . . . . . . . 100 W (1kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 6 ⦠) Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W per channel (1kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 6 ⦠) Subwoofer . . . . 100 W (100Hz, 10 % T.H.D., 6 ⦠) EV500 model Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W per channel (1 kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 6 ⦠) ⢠Disc section Digital audio characteristics . . . . . . . . . DVD fs: 96 kHz, 24-bit Type . . . DVD system, Video CD/Super VCD system and Compact Disc digital audio system Frequency response . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Hz to 44 kHz S/N ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 dB Dynamic range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 dB Total harmonic distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.005 % Wow and Flutter. . . . . . . . Limit of measurement (ñ0.001 % W.PEAK) or less (JEITA) ⢠Cassette deck section Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 track, 2-channel stereo Heads . . . . . . . . . . Recording/playback head x 1 Erasing head x 1 Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC servo motor x 1 Tape types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type I (Normal) ⢠FM tuner section Frequency range . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 ⦠, unbalanced ⢠AM tuner section Frequency range With 9kHz step . . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1,602 kHz With 10kHz step . . . . . . . 530 kHz to 1,700 kHz Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna ⢠Miscellaneous Power requirements Multi voltage model . . . . . AC 110-127/220-230/ 240 V (switchable), 50/60 Hz Power consumption EV700/1000 model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 W EV500 model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 W Power consumption in standby mode . . . . 0.5 W Dimensions: DVD Tuner Deck Receiver . . . . 170(W) 351.5 (H) 340.1 (D) mm Weight: DVD Tuner Deck Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 kg ⢠Accessories (Stereo DVD Tuner Deck) Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Power cord Central and South American, Taiwan, Philippines models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 All other models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Power plug adapter (Central and South American, US Military and Duty Free models only) . . . . . . 1 Video cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FM antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Dry cell batteries (AA/R6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Warranty Card (US Military and Duty Free models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 These operating instructions Speaker system ⢠Front speakers (S-EV500V/700V) Enclosure . . . . . . . . . Bass-reflex bookshelf type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm 2-way system Speakers: Woofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 cm cone type Tweeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm come type Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Hz to 20 kHz Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . 200 (W) x 351.5 (H) x 235.5 (D) mm Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 kg EV-500-1000.book 61 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 62 En ⢠Front speakers (S-EV1000V) Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passive radiator type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm 2-way system Speakers: Woofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm cone type Tweeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm come type Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Hz to 20 kHz Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 (W) x 465.5 (H) x 294 (D) mm Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 kg ⢠Center speaker (S-EV700V/1000V only) Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm 1-way system Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm cone type Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Hz to 18 kHz Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W Dimensions . . . . . 361 (W) x 108 (H) x 96 (D) mm Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.9 kg ⢠Surround speakers (S-EV700V/1000V only) Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm 1-way system Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm cone type Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Hz to 20 kHz Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W Dimensions . . . . . 190 (W) x 108 (H) x 96 (D) mm Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.75 kg ⢠Subwoofer (S-EV700V/1000V only) Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passive radiator type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm 1-way system Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm cone type Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Hz to 2 kHz Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 (W) x 351.5 (H) x 430 (D) mm Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 kg ⢠Accessories (Speaker System) Speaker cords (S-EV1000 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Speaker stands (S-EV700/1000 only) . . . . . . . . . 2 Non-skid pads (S-EV700/1000 only) . . . . . . . . . 12 Note ⢠Specifications and design subject to possible modification without notice, due to improvements. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.âÂÂDolbyâÂÂ, âÂÂPro Logicâ and the double- D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDTSâ and âÂÂDTS Digital Surroundâ are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. This product includes F ontA venueî fonts licenced by NEC corporation. F ontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is pr otected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited uses only unless other wise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback, etc. of material on devices other than the PC (or other WMA recor ding equipment) used to recor d it. F or detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC and/or software. EV-500-1000.book 62 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
<05D00001> Printed in <XRB3053-A> Published by Pioneer Corporation Copyright é2005 Pioneer Corporation All rights reserved Published by Pioneer Corporation Copyright é2005 Pioneer Corporation All rights reserved PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F . 1 1000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_A_En EV-500-1000.book 64 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ